Honda 2012 Cr V Owners Manual
Honda-2012-Cr-V-Unlinked-Owners-Manual-107007 honda-2012-cr-v-unlinked-owners-manual-107007
Owners Manual Pdf 2012+Honda+CRV+OM 2012 Honda CR V Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf
0A1212OM 2012 Honda CR-V Maintenance Schedule | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS
2015-10-23
: Honda Honda-2012-Honda-Cr-V-Owners-Manual-816754 honda-2012-honda-cr-v-owners-manual-816754 honda pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 384 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
2012 CR-V
Owner’s Manual
(Unlinked)
This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web use. This is due to changes
in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a
hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.
P/N 00X31-T0A-
© 2011 American Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved 6000
Contents
This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
features.
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.
2Safe Driving P. 25
For Safe Driving P. 26 Seat Belts P. 31 Airbags P. 39
2Instrument Panel P. 69
Indicators P. 70 Gauges and Displays P. 79
2Controls P. 97
Setting the Clock P. 98 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 100
Opening and Closing the Moonroof* P. 116
Adjusting the Seats P. 128
Climate Control System* P. 151
2Features P. 155
Audio System P. 156 Audio System Basic Operation P. 159
General Information on the Audio System P. 210
2Driving P. 245
Before Driving P. 246 Towing a Trailer P. 251
Parking Your Vehicle P. 277
Multi-View Rear Camera* P. 278
2Maintenance P. 285
Before Performing Maintenance P. 286 Maintenance Minder™ P. 289
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 316
Remote Control and Wireless Headphone Care* P. 331
2Handling the Unexpected P. 339
Tools P. 340 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 341
Overheating P. 351 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 353
2Information P. 363
Specifications P. 364 Identification Numbers P. 366
Emissions Testing P. 369 Warranty Coverages P. 371
CR-V-31T0A600.book 0 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Contents
Child Safety P. 54 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 67 Safety Labels P. 68
Opening and Closing the Tailgate P. 110 Security System P. 112 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 114
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 117 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 126
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 138 Heating and Cooling System* P. 148
Rear Entertainment System* P. 193 Audio Error Messages P. 205 Audio Remote Controls P. 209
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®* P. 214 Compass* P. 243
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 257 When Driving P. 259 Braking P. 273
Refueling P. 279 Fuel Economy P. 282 Accessories and Modifications P. 283
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 297 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 309
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 320 Battery P. 329 Remote Transmitter Care P. 330
Heating and Cooling System*/Climate Control System* Maintenance P. 333 Cleaning P. 334
Engine Does Not Start P. 347 Jump Starting P. 348 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 350
Fuses P. 357 Emergency Towing P. 360
When You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 361
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 367 Reporting Safety Defects P. 368
Authorized Manuals P. 373 Customer Service Information P. 374
Quick Reference Guide P. 2
Safe Driving P. 25
Instrument Panel P. 69
Controls P. 97
Features P. 155
Driving P. 245
Maintenance P. 285
Handling the Unexpected P. 339
Information P. 363
Index P. 375
CR-V-31T0A600.book 1 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
2
Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
❙Hazard Warning Button
❙ECON Button (P 125)
❙Navigation System*
() See Navigation System Manual
❙Audio System (P 156)
❙Heating and Cooling System*
(P 148)
❙Climate Control System* (P 151)
❙Rear Window Defogger (P 124)
❙Ignition Switch (P 117)
❙Steering Wheel Adjustments
(P 125)
❙ (Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
System OFF) Button (P 268)
❙Heated Mirror Button* (P 124)
❙System Indicators (P 70)
❙Gauges (P 79)
❙Information Display (P 80)
❙Multi-Information Display* (P 83)
❙Audio Display*
CR-V-31T0A600.book 2 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
3
Quick Reference Guide
❙ (SEL/RESET) Knob (P 80)
❙Brightness Control (P 123)
❙Wipers/Washers (P 121)
❙Navigation System Voice Control Buttons*
() See Navigation System Manual
❙Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System
Voice Control Buttons* (P 214)
❙Horn (Press an area around .)
❙MENU Button* (P 86)
❙(+ / (- / / Buttons (P 86)
❙SOURCE Button (P 86)
❙ (Display) Button* (P 83)
❙Cruise Control Buttons (P 265)
❙Headlights/Turn Signals (P 118)
❙Fog Lights* (P 120)
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 3 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Visual Index
4
Quick Reference Guide
❙Power Door Lock Master Switch (P 105)
❙Power Window Switches (P 114)
❙Rearview Mirror (P 126)
❙Interior Fuse Box (P 358)
❙Parking Brake (P 273)
❙Hood Release Handle (P 298)
❙Accessory Power Socket
(P 141)
❙Seat Heater Switches*
(P 145)
❙Shift Lever
Automatic Transmission
(P 262)
❙Glove Box (P 139)
❙Driver's Front Airbag (P 42)
❙Door Mirror Controls (P 127)
❙Driver’s Pocket
❙Passenger's Front Airbag
(P 42)
❙Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P 280)
CR-V-31T0A600.book 4 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
5
Quick Reference Guide
❙Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 63)
❙Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 62)
❙Sun Visors
❙Vanity Mirrors
❙Moonroof Switch* (P 116)
❙Map Lights (P 138)
❙Front Seat (P 128)
❙Seat Belts (P 31)
❙Side Airbags (P 46)
❙Rear Seat (P 135)
❙LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 59)
❙Ceiling Light (P 138)
❙Side Curtain Airbags (P 49)
❙Coat Hook (P 142)
❙Grab Handle
❙Sunglasses Holder (P 144)
❙Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor (P 36)
❙Rear Entertainment System* (P 193)
❙Cargo Area Light (P 138)
❙Accessory Power Socket (P 141)
❙Console Side Pocket
❙USB Adapter Cable (P 157)
❙Auxiliary Input Jack* (P 157)
❙Accessory Power Socket* (P 141)
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 5 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Visual Index
6
Quick Reference Guide
❙Audio Antenna (P 158)
❙Windshield Wipers (P 121, 316)
❙Door Lock/Unlock Control (P 102)
❙Headlights (P 118, 309)
❙How to Refuel (P 280)
❙High-Mount Brake Light (P 315)
❙Tailgate Release Button (P 111)
❙Opening/Closing the Tailgate
(P 110)
❙Rear Wiper (P 122, 318)
❙Back-Up Lights (P 312)
❙Brake/Taillights (P 312)
❙Rear Turn Signal Lights (P 312)
❙Rear Side Marker Lights (P 312)
❙Power Door Mirrors (P 127)
❙Maintenance Under the Hood (P 297)
❙Fog Lights* (P 120, 310)
❙Multi-View Rear Camera* (P 278)
❙Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights (P 118, 312)
❙Side Marker Lights (P 118, 311)
❙Tires (P 320, 341)
CR-V-31T0A600.book 6 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
7
Quick Reference Guide
Eco Assist System (P 125)
Ambient Meter
●Changes color to reflect your driving
style.
Green: Fuel efficient driving
Yellow: Moderate acceleration/
deceleration
White: Aggressive acceleration/
deceleration
●The ambient meter color changes in
accordance with your brake or
accelerator pedal operation.
ECON Button (P 125)
Helps maximize fuel economy.
ECON Mode Indicator (P 77)
Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 7 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
8
Quick Reference Guide
Safe Driving (P 25)
Airbags (P 39)
●Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P 54)
●All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
●Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
●Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 67)
●Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon
monoxide gas can accumulate.
Before Driving Checklist (P 30)
●Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Seat Belts (P 31)
●Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
●Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 8 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
9
Quick Reference Guide
Instrument Panel (P 69)
System Indicators
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®) System
Indicator
VSA® OFF Indicator
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Lights Reminders
Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Fog Light Indicator*
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
System Indicators
Cruise Control
Indicator
Parking Brake
and Brake System
Indicator
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
Door Open Indicator
Cruise Main Indicator
Tachometer Speedometer Fuel
Gauge
Security System
Alarm Indicator
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
Gauges (P 79)/Information Display (P 80)/
Multi-Information Display* (P 83)/System Indicators (P 70)
Tailgate Open
Indicator
ECON Mode Indicator
TPMS Indicator Maintenance Minder
Indicator
Washer Level
Indicator*
Ambient Meter
Temperature Gauge
Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
Indicator
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
AWD System
Indicator*
System Indicators
Canada
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 9 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
10
Quick Reference Guide
Controls (P 97)
Turn Signals (P 118)
Turn Signal Control Lever
Right
Left
Lights (P 118)
Light Control Switches
Low Beam
High Beam
Flashing
Wipers and Washers
(P 121)
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Adjustment Ring
: Long Delay
: Short Delay
MIST
OFF
INT: Low speed with intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 10 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
11
Quick Reference Guide
Steering Wheel (P 125)
●To adjust, pull the adjustment lever
towards you, adjust to the desired
position, then lock the lever back in place.
Unlocking the Front
Doors from the Inside
(P 104)
●Pull either front door inner handle to
unlock and open it at the same time.
Tailgate (P 110)
●With all the doors unlocked, push the
tailgate release button on the tailgate to
open it.
Power Door Mirrors
(P 127)
●With the ignition switch in ON (w, move
the selector switch to L or R.
●Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
Power Windows (P 114)
●With the ignition switch in ON (w, open
and close the power windows.
●If the power window lock button is in the
off position, each passenger's window
can be opened and closed with its own
switch.
●If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator is on), each
passenger's window switch is disabled.
Power Window Lock Button
Window
Switch
Indicator
CR-V-31T0A600.book 11 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
12
Quick Reference Guide
Heating and Cooling System* (P 148)
●Rotate the fan control dial to adjust the fan speed.
●Press the Mode buttons ( / / / ) to select the vents air flows from.
●Rotate the temperature control dial to adjust the temperature.
●Use the button for maximum cool setting.
●Rotate the fan control dial to OFF to turn the system off.
●Press the button to defrost the windshield.
Fan Control
Dial
(Rear Window Defogger/
Heated Mirror*) Button
(Windshield
Defroster) Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from dashboard
vents.
Button
Button
Button (Recirculation) Button
Temperature
Control Dial
Button Button
CR-V-31T0A600.book 12 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
13
Quick Reference Guide
Climate Control System* (P 151)
●Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
●Press the button to turn the system on or off.
●Press the button to defrost the windshield.
The climate control system is voice operable. See the navigation system manual for complete
details.
Models with navigation system
Driver's Side
Temperature
Control Dial
/ (Fan Control) Buttons
(Windshield
Defroster) Button
A/C (Air Conditioning)
Button
Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from dashboard
vents.
SYNC (Synchronized) Button
(Recirculation) Button
AUTO Button
Passenger's Side
Temperature
Control Dial
(Rear Window Defogger/
Heated Mirror*) Button
MODE Control Button
(On/Off) Button
Clock (P 98)
aPress the CLOCK (AUX) button until the
displayed time begins flashing.
bPress Preset (4 (Hour) or (5 (Minute)
to set the time. Press Preset (6 (Reset)
to set the time to the nearest hour.
cPress the CLOCK button again to set
the time.
To set the time to the nearest hour:
Press and hold the CLOCK button until the
clock display begins to blink, then press the
(6 (Reset) button.
Depending on the displayed time, the clock
sets forward or backward.
Example:
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:53 will reset to 2:00
The navigation system receives signals from
GPS satellites, updating the clock
automatically.
Models without navigation system
Models with navigation system
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 13 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
14
Quick Reference Guide
Features (P 155)
Audio System (P 156) For navigation system operation () See Navigation System Manual
AM Button
FM Button
(Power) Button
CD Button
AUX Button
CD Slot
(CD Eject) Button
SCAN Button
Preset Buttons (1-6)
SKIP/SEEK Button
Button
SETUP Button
Selector Knob
Button
(Sound) Button
SKIP/SEEK Button
(P 159)
Models without multi-information display
CR-V-31T0A600.book 14 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
15
Quick Reference Guide
(P 173)
Models with multi-information display
Multi-Information Display
AM Button
FM Button
SCAN Button
SKIP/SEEK Button
Selector Knob
Button
(Power)
Button
CD Button
AUX Button
CD Slot
(CD Eject)
Button
Preset Buttons
(1-6)
Button
SETUP Button
SKIP/SEEK Button
PHONE Button
Button*
FM/AM Button*
●Audio Remote Controls (P 209)
●(+ / (- Button
Press and release to adjust the volume up/
down.
●SOURCE Button
Press and release to change the audio
mode: FM1/FM2/AM/CD/XM1*/XM2*/AUX.
● / Button
Radio:Press and release to change the
preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
CD/USB device:
Press and release to skip to the
beginning of the next song or
return to the beginning of the
current song.
Press and hold to change a folder.
(+ / (- Button
SOURCE
Button
/ Button
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 15 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
16
Quick Reference Guide
Driving (P 245)
Release Button Shift Lever
Depress the brake pedal and press the
release button to move out of (P.
Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.
Press the release button to
move the shift lever.
Automatic Transmission (P 263)
●Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
●Shifting
Park
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.
Reverse
Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
Drive
Normal driving.
Drive (D3)
Press the (d button while the shift lever is in
(D.
Used when:
•Going up or down hills
•Towing a trailer in hilly terrain
Second
Used to increase engine braking
(the transmission is locked in 2nd gear)
First
Used to further increase engine braking
(the transmission is locked in 1st gear)
(d Button
CR-V-31T0A600.book 16 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
17
Quick Reference Guide
VSA® OFF Button (P 269)
●The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system
helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering, and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
●VSA® comes on automatically every time
you start the engine.
●To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
Cruise Control (P 265)
●Cruise control allows you to maintain a
set speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
●To use cruise control, press the CRUISE
button, then press once you have
received the desired speed (above 25 mph
or 40 km/h).
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (P 270)
●TPMS monitors tire pressure.
●TPMS is turned on automatically every
time you start the engine.
–/SET
Refueling (P 279)
aPull the fuel fill door
release handle.
bTurn the fuel fill cap
slowly to remove the
cap.
cPlace the cap in the
holder on the fuel fill
door.
dAfter refueling, screw
the cap back on until it
clicks at least once.
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number 87 or
higher required
Fuel tank capacity: 15.3 US gal (58 L)
CR-V-31T0A600.book 17 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
18
Quick Reference Guide
Maintenance (P 285)
Under the Hood (P 297)
●Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer
fluid. Add when necessary.
●Check brake fluid.
●Check the battery condition monthly.
aPull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.
bLocate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up
the hood.
cWhen finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.
Lights (P 309)
●Inspect all lights regularly.
Wiper Blades (P 316)
●Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield.
Tires (P 320)
●Inspect tires and wheels regularly.
●Check tire pressures regularly.
●Install snow tires for winter
driving.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 18 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Quick Reference Guide
19
Handling the Unexpected (P 339)
Flat Tire (P 341)
●Park in a safe location and replace the
flat tire with the compact spare tire in the
cargo area.
Indicators Come On
(P 353)
●Identify the indicator and consult the
owner's manual.
Engine Won't Start
(P 347)
●If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.
Blown Fuse (P 357)
●Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.
Overheating (P 351)
●Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.
Emergency Towing
(P 360)
●Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 19 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
20
Quick Reference Guide
What to Do If
The ignition switch does
not turn from (0 to (q.
Why?
●The steering wheel may be locked.
●Try to turn the steering wheel left and right
while turning the ignition key.
The ignition switch does
not turn from (q to (0 and
I cannot remove the key.
Why?
The shift lever should be moved to (P.
Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?
This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.
The rear door cannot be
opened from inside the
vehicle. Why?
Check if the childproof lock is in the
lock position. If so, open the rear
door with the outside door handle.
To cancel this function, push the
lever to the unlock position.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 20 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
21
Quick Reference Guide
Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors
using a remote
transmitter?
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.
Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver's door?
The beeper sounds when:
●The key is left in the ignition switch.
●The exterior lights are left on.
Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?
The beeper sounds when:
●Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.
●The parking brake lever is not fully released.
Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 21 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
22
Quick Reference Guide
California Proposition 65 Warning
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
•How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
•How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
WARNING: This product contains or emits
chemicals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
NOTICE
CR-V-31T0A600.book 22 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
23
Quick Reference Guide
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
●Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
●Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
●Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
●Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
●Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.
3DANGER
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3WARNING
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3CAUTION
You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 23 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
24
CR-V-31T0A600.book 24 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
25
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions ............. 26
Important Handling Information......... 28
Your Vehicle's Safety Features............ 29
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts........................ 31
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 34
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 38
Airbags
Airbag System Components............... 39
Types of Airbags ................................ 42
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 42
Side Airbags ...................................... 46
Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 49
Airbag System Indicators.................... 50
Airbag Care ....................................... 53
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 54
Safety of Infants and Small Children .......56
Safety of Larger Children ................... 65
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 67
Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 68
CR-V-31T0A600.book 25 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
26
Safe Driving
For Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Important Safety Precautions
■Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
■Restrain all children
Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.
■Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
■Don't drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
driver while driving.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 26 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
27
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions
Safe Driving
■Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.
■Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
■Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 27 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
28
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Handling Information
Safe Driving
Important Handling Information
Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use
only on pavement. Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway
driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also
provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher
off the ground, it has a higher center gravity making it more susceptible to tripping
or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder,
make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.
1Important Handling Information
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.
2Precautions While Driving P. 261
2Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 257
CR-V-31T0A600.book 28 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
29
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features
Continued
Safe Driving
Your Vehicle's Safety Features
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.
1Your Vehicle's Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.
Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.
Safety Cage
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Side Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Door Locks
Seat Belt Tensioners
Occupant Position Detection
System (OPDS) Sensor
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
6
912
10
11
7
8
7
10
8
9
CR-V-31T0A600.book 29 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features
30
Safe Driving
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
•After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are
closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant
from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the
tailgate.
2Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 104
•Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2Adjusting the Seats P. 128
•Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 131
•Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2Fastening a Seat Belt P. 34
•Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child's age, height
and weight.
2Child Safety P. 54
■Safety CheckList
1Safety CheckList
If the door and/or the tailgate open indicator is on, a
door and/or the tailgate is not completely closed.
Close all doors and the tailgate tightly until the
indicator goes off.
2Door Open Indicator P. 74
2Tailgate Open Indicator P. 74
CR-V-31T0A600.book 30 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
31
Continued
Safe Driving
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
-frontal impacts
-side impacts
-rear impacts
-rollovers
■Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
restrain your body. The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with
child seats.
2Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 62
1About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
3
WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 31 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
32
Safe Driving
■Proper use of seat belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use:
•All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduces the effectiveness of
the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
•Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
•Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
•Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w before
the driver's seat belt is fastened, a beeper will
sound and the indicator will blink. If the driver
does not fasten the belt before the beeper
stops, the indicator will remain on.
The beeper will also periodically sound and
the indicator will blink while driving until the
driver's and front passenger’s seat belts are
fastened.
■Seat Belt Reminder
1About Your Seat Belts
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.
1Seat Belt Reminder
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within 6 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger's seat,
or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator
will not come on.
This is because the weight sensors in the seat cannot
detect their presence.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 32 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
33
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to-
severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to
inflate the front airbags.
■Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 33 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
34
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2Adjusting the Seats P. 128
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
uMake sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.
Pull out slowly.
Correct
Seated
Posture.
Latch
Plate
Buckle
CR-V-31T0A600.book 34 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 35
uuSeat Belts uFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter
occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while
holding the release button.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then
guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of
the way and will not get caught by closing the door.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.
Lap belt
as low as
possible
■Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
one level at a time.
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
anchor position is secure.
Push
Push
CR-V-31T0A600.book 35 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
36
Safe Driving
1. Pull out the seat belt’s small latch plate and
the latch plate from each holding slot in the
ceiling.
2. Line up the triangle marks on the small
latch plate and anchor buckle. Make sure
the seat belt is not twisted. Attach the belt
to the anchor buckle.
3. Insert the latch plate into the buckle.
Properly fasten the seat belt the same way
you fasten the lap/shoulder seat belt.
■Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
1Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch
plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.
3
WARNING
Using the seat belt with the detachable
anchor unlatched increases the chance of
serious injury or death in a crash.
Before using the seat belt, make sure the
detachable anchor is correctly latched.
Small Latch Plate
Latch Plate
Small Latch Plate
Latch Plate
Small Latch Plate
Anchor Buckle
Latch
Plate
Buckle
CR-V-31T0A600.book 36 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
37
uuSeat Belts uFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.
■Advice for Pregnant Women
1Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
•When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
•When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.
Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.
Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 37 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
38
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Safe Driving
Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
•Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
•Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily.
uIf a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.
1Seat Belt Inspection
3
WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 38 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
39
Continued
Safe Driving
Airbags
Airbag System Components
n
c
d
b
f
h
h
e
h
akl ih agj j b e c
h
h
m
CR-V-31T0A600.book 39 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
40
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving
The front, front side, and side curtain
airbags are deployed according to the
direction and severity of impact. Both side
curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover.
The airbag system includes:
aTwo SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
front airbags. The driver's airbag is stored
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger's airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.
bTwo side airbags, one for the driver and
one for a front passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
cTwo side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
dAn electronic control unit that continually
monitors and records information about
the sensors, the airbag activators, the
seat belt tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the ignition
switch is in ON (w.
eAutomatic front seat belt tensioners. The
driver's and front passenger's seat belts
incorporate sensors that detect whether
or not they are fastened.
fA driver's seat position sensor. If the seat
is too far forward, the airbag will inflate
with less force.
gWeight sensors in the front passenger's
seat. The front passenger's airbag will be
turned off if the weight on the seat is 65
lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant
or small child).
hImpact sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front or side collision.
iAn indicator on the dashboard that alerts
you that the front passenger's front
airbag has been turned off.
jSensors that can detect if a child or small
statured adult is in the deployment path
of the front passenger's side airbag.
kAn indicator on the instrument panel that
alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
lAn indicator on the instrument panel that
alerts you that the front passenger's side
airbag has been turned off.
mSafing Sensor
nA rollover sensor that detects whether
the vehicle is about to roll over.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 40 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
41
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause minor injuries,
sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and
sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the
covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags
or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
■Important Facts About Your Airbags
1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 41 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
42
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Safe Driving
Types of Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:
•Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats.
•Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs.
•Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.
Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate to severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary
restraint system.
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
■Housing Locations
1Types of Airbags
The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch
is in ON (w.
1Front Airbags (SRS)
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags
(SRS)
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiple-
threshold front airbags (SRS).
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 42 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 43
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won't interfere with the driver's visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
■Operation
■How the Front Airbags Work
1How the Front Airbags Work
After a front airbag inflates in a crash, you may see
what looks like smoke. This is actually powder from
the airbag's surface. Although the powder is not
harmful, people with respiratory problems may
experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs,
get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 43 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
44
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
■When front airbags should not deploy
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur
during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: Seat belts and, in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags
and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags
could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a
rollover.
■When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 44 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
45
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag
related injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver's advanced front airbag system
includes a seat position sensor.
If the seat is too far forward, the airbag
inflates with less force, regardless of the
severity of the impact.
The passenger's advanced front airbag system
has weight sensors.
Although Honda recommends against
carrying an infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of a child (up to
about 65 lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn off the passenger's front
airbag.
■Advanced Airbags
1Advanced Airbags
If there is a problem with the driver's seat position
sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag
will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the
driver's seating position.
For both advanced front airbags to work properly:
•Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
•Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
•Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
•All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
•Do not place any cover over the passenger side
dashboard.
Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor
Passenger’s
Seat
Weight
Sensors
CR-V-31T0A600.book 45 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
46
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving
Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front passenger
during a moderate to severe side impact.
The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver's and passenger's seat-
backs.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
When the sensors detect a moderate-to-
severe side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.
■Housing Locations
1Side Airbags
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
If the impact is on the passenger side, the airbag
deploys even if there is no passenger in the passenger
seat.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.
Housing
Location
■Operation
When
inflated
Side
Airbag
CR-V-31T0A600.book 46 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
47
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Continued
Safe Driving
■When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag systems senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.
■When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards
the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts
absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have
been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 47 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
48
Safe Driving
To reduce the likelihood that a front passenger may be injured by an inflating side
airbag, the passenger side airbag is automatically turned off when:
•The height sensors detect a child or short-statured adult is seated in the front
passenger seat.
•The position sensor detects that the front passenger is leaning into the
deployment path of the side airbag.
When the side airbag cutoff system is activated, the side airbag off indicator comes
on.
2Side Airbag Off Indicator P. 52
If the side airbag off indicator comes on, have the passenger sit upright. A few
seconds after the passenger is sitting properly, the side airbag will automatically be
turned on, and the indicator will go off.
If the front passenger is a child, stop when it is safe to do so, and have the child sit
properly restrained in a rear seat.
■Side Airbag Cutoff System
■Side Airbag Off Indicator
1Side Airbag Cutoff System
The sensors that monitor the front passenger's height
and body position may not work if:
•The seat-back is wet
•The passenger is touching a metal or other
electrical conductive object
•A seat cushion is on the seat
•The passenger is wearing excessively thick clothing
Sensor that
monitor the
passenger’s height.
Sensor that monitor
the passenger’s position.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 48 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
49
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Continued
Safe Driving
Side Curtain Airbags
Side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer
seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags
equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly
rollover crashes.
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.
■Housing Locations
1Side Curtain Airbags
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
The airbag on the passenger's side will deploy, and
the seat belt tensioner will activate, even if there are
no passengers on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
■Operation
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
CR-V-31T0A600.book 49 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
50
Safe Driving
■When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate to severe angled frontal
collision.
In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags.
Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on.
■When the ignition switch is turned to
ON (w
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don't, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
■SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator
1SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator
3
WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 50 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 51
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Safe Driving
■When the passenger airbag off
indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger's front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the weight sensors detect
65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an infant
or small child, on the seat.
Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2Child Safety P. 54
Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.
If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger's front airbag will not deploy and
the indicator will not come on.
■Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and
no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult
riding there, something may be interfering with the
weight sensors. Such as:
•An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.
•A child seat or other object pressing against the
rear of the seat-back.
•A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger's seat.
•The front seat or seat-back is forced back against
an object on the seat or floor behind it.
•An object placed under the front passenger's seat.
If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold.
U.S. Canada
CR-V-31T0A600.book 51 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
52
Safe Driving
■When the side airbag off indicator comes on
This indicator comes on if the passenger's side
airbag has been turned off because the
passenger is too small to be sitting in the front
seat, is slouching or not sitting upright, or has
leaned into the airbag's deployment path.
Unless the passenger is a smaller statured
adult or a child, the indicator should go off
when the passenger returns to a proper
upright sitting position.
■Side Airbag Off Indicator
1Side Airbag Off Indicator
When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, the
indicator should come on for a few seconds and then
go out. If it doesn't come on, stays on, or comes on
while driving without a passenger in the front seat,
have the system checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
Canada
U.S.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 52 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
53
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care
Safe Driving
Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
■When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.
■When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
■Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable the driver's seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the
passenger's seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate
a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American
Honda Automobile Customer Service at 800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles,
Honda Canada Customer Relations at 888-9-HONDA-9.
1Airbag Care
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 53 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
54
Safe Driving
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the
number one cause of death of children age 12 and under.
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
•An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
•A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver's ability to safely
control the vehicle.
•Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.
1Protecting Child Passengers
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Canada recommend
that all children age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/
territories have laws restricting where children may
ride.
3
WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 54 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
55
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers
Safe Driving
•Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt
portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
•Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.
•Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
•Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
•Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
•Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
1Protecting Child Passengers
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger's front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle warning came
with a label on the dashboard (U.S. models) and has
labels on the front visors. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
2Safety Labels P. 68
3
WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 55 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
56
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
Safety of Infants and Small Children
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
infant reaches the seat maker's weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is
at least one year old.
■Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag
system.
2Airbags P. 39
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
■Protecting Infants
1Protecting Infants
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a
forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.
3
WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 56 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 57
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child
seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured
forward-facing child seat.
■Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forward-
facing child seat in a rear seating position.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.
■Protecting Smaller Children
1Protecting Smaller Children
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
up to age two, if the child’s height and weight are
appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
3
WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 57 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
58
Safe Driving
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer's use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual.
Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.
■Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
•The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
•The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
•The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
■Selecting a Child Seat
1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 58 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
59
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Continued
Safe Driving
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in rear seats. A child seat is attached
to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.
2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
uWhen installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.
■Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Marks
Rigid Type
Lower Anchors
CR-V-31T0A600.book 59 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
60
Safe Driving
3. Put the head restraint to its upper-most
position, then route the tether strap
between the head restraint legs, and secure
the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
4. Go to step 7.
3. Lower the head restraint to its lowest
position.
4. Open the anchor cover.
Flexible Type
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
For your child's safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat
that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.
Tether
Strap
Hook
Anchor
Outer position
Outer position
Cover
Center Lower Anchor
Center position
Center position
CR-V-31T0A600.book 60 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
61
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Continued
Safe Driving
5. Route the tether strap over the head
restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
6. Secure the tether strap hook onto the
anchor.
7. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat maker.
8. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
9. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
Tether Strap
Hook
Anchor
Center position
All models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 61 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
62
Safe Driving
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat maker's instructions,
and insert the latch plate into the buckle.
uInsert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into
the retractor, then try to pull it out to make
sure the retractor is locked.
uIf you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Pull the seat belt all the way
out, and repeat steps 3 – 4.
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
uWhen doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.
■Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 62 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 63
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
Two tether anchorage points are provided
behind the rear outer seating positions and
one in the ceiling for the rear center. A child
seat that is installed with a seat belt and
comes with a tether can use the tether for
additional security.
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
■Adding Security with a Tether
Tether Anchorage Points
Anchor Fitting
1Adding Security with a Tether
Since a tether can provide additional security to the
lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend
using a tether whenever one is available.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 63 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
64
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
■Using an outer anchor
1. Put the head restraint to its upper-most
position, then route the tether strap
through the head restraint legs. Make sure
the strap is not twisted.
2. Secure the tether strap hook onto the
anchor.
3. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
■Using the center anchor
1. Lower the head restraint to its lowest
position.
2. Open the anchor cover.
3. Route the tether strap over the head
restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
4. Secure the tether strap hook onto the
anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
Tether
Strap
Hook
Anchor
Tether Strap
Hook
Anchor
CR-V-31T0A600.book 64 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
65
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Continued
Safe Driving
Safety of Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■Checklist
•Do the child's knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
•Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child's neck and arm?
•Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child's thighs?
•Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
■Protecting Larger Children
■Checking Seat Belt Fit
1Safety of Larger Children
3
WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger's front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 65 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
66
Safe Driving
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
a rear seating position. For the child's safety,
check that the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer's recommendations.
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
•Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
•Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
•Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
•Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.
■Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.
■Booster Seats
1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.
There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.
■Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
CR-V-31T0A600.book 66 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
67
Safe Driving
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
■Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
•The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
•The exhaust system may have been damaged.
•The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate
open, open all the windows and set the heating and cooling system*/climate control
system* as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the heating and cooling system*/climate control system* in the same manner
if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.
3
WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 67 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
68
Safe Driving
Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.
Sun Visor
U.S. models Canadian models
Radiator Cap
U.S. models
U.S. models only
Dashboard
Canadian models
Doorjambs
U.S. models only
Sun Visor
CR-V-31T0A600.book 68 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
69
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
Indicators ............................................ 70
Gauges and Displays
Gauges.............................................. 79
Information Display............................ 80
Multi-Information Display*................. 83
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 69 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
70
Instrument Panel
Indicators
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Parking Brake
and Brake
System Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w, then
goes off.
●Comes on when the parking brake is
applied, and goes off when it is released.
●Comes on when the brake fluid level is
low.
●Comes on if there is a problem with the
brake system.
●The beeper sounds and the indicator
comes on if you drive with the parking
brake not fully released.
●Comes on while driving - Make sure the parking
brake is released. Check the brake fluid level.
2What to do when the indicator comes on while
driving P. 355
●Comes on along with the ABS indicator - Have
the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2If the Brake System Indicator Comes On P. 355
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
●Comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w, and goes off when the
engine starts.
●Comes on when the engine oil pressure is
low.
●Comes on while driving - Immediately stop in a safe
place.
2If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On P. 353
U.S.
Canada
CR-V-31T0A600.book 70 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
71
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
●Comes on when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (w, and goes off either when the
engine starts or after several seconds if the
engine is not started. If "readiness codes"
have not been set, it blinks five times before it
goes off.
●Comes on if there is a problem with the
emissions control system.
●Blinks when a misfire in the engine's cylinders
is detected.
●Readiness codes are part of the on board diagnostics
for the emissions control systems.
2Testing of Readiness Codes P. 369
●Comes on while driving - Have the vehicle checked
by a dealer.
●Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place where
there are no flammable objects. Stop the engine for
10 minutes or more, and wait for it to cool down.
Then, take the vehicle to a dealer.
2If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks P. 354
Charging System
Indicator
●Comes on when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (w, and goes off when the engine
starts.
●Comes on when the battery is not charging.
●Comes on while driving - Turn off the heating and
cooling system*/climate control system* system and
rear defogger in order to reduce electricity
consumption.
2If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
P. 353
Shift Lever
Position Indicator
●Indicates current shift lever position.
(d indicator:
●Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
●Comes on when you press the (d button
while the shift lever is in (D.
2Shifting P. 263
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 71 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
72
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Transmission
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
●Blinks if the transmission system has a
problem.
●Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts and
acceleration and have the vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
Seat Belt
Reminder
Indicator
●Comes on and the beeper sounds if you are
not wearing a seat belt when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w. If the front
passenger is not wearing a seat belt, the
indicator comes on about six seconds later.
●Blinks while driving if either you or the front
passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The
beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at
regular intervals.
●The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when you
and the front passenger fasten their seat belts.
●Stays on after you or the front passenger has
fastened the seat belt - A detection error may have
occurred in the sensor. Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.
2Seat Belt Reminder P. 32
Low Fuel
Indicator
●Comes on when the fuel reserve is running
low (approximately 2.3 U.S. gal./8.6 Liter
left).
●Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel
gauge.
●Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible.
●Blinks - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 72 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
73
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System)
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
●If it comes on at any other time, there is a
problem with the ABS.
●Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has
normal braking ability but no anti-lock function.
2ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 275
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
●Comes on if a problem with any of the
following is detected:
-Supplemental restraint system
-Side airbag system
-Side curtain airbag system
-Seat belt tensioner
●Stays on constantly or does not come on at all -
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
AWD System
Indicator*
●Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
●Comes on if there is a problem with the
AWD.
●Blinks when the AWD system is overheated.
The system is inactive.
●Stays on constantly - the engine drives the front
wheels only in this state. Have the vehicle checked by
a dealer.
●Blinks while driving - the engine drives the front
wheels only in this state. Stop in a safe place, shift to
(P, and idle the engine until the indicator goes off. If
the indicator does not stop blinking, take your vehicle
to a dealer.
2REAL TIME AWD with Intelligent Control
System™* P. 270
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 73 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
74
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
VSA® (Vehicle
Stability Assist)
System Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
●Blinks when VSA® is active.
●Comes on if there is a problem with the
VSA® system.
●Comes on if there is a problem with the hill
start assist system.
●Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.
2VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC
(Electronic Stability Control), System P. 268
VSA® (Vehicle
Stability Assist)
OFF Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
●Comes on when you deactivate VSA®.
2VSA® On and Off P. 269
Door Open
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds if you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
●Comes on if any door is not completely
closed.
●The beeper sounds and the indicator comes
on if any door is opened while driving.
●Goes off when all doors are closed.
Tailgate Open
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds if you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
●Comes on if the tailgate is not completely
closed.
●Goes off when the tailgate is closed.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 74 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
75
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
EPS (Electric
Power Steering
System) Indicator
●Comes on when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (w, and goes off when the engine
starts.
●Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS
(Electric Power Steering System).
●Stays on constantly or does not come on at all -
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2If the EPS Indicator Comes On P. 355
TPMS Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
●Comes on if there is a problem with the
TPMS, or when a compact spare tire is
temporarily installed.
●Stays on constantly or does not come on at all -
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is
fitted with a compact spare, get your regular tire
repaired or replaced and put back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
●Comes on if the tire pressure of any of the
tires becomes significantly low.
●Comes on for a while and then goes off
when a compact spare tire is temporarily
installed.
●Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe place,
check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if
necessary.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 75 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
76
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Turn Signal
Indicators
●The turn signal indicators blink when you
operate the turn signal lever.
●If you press the hazard warning button, both
indicators and all turn signals blink at the
same time.
●Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn signal
light bulb has blown. Change the bulb immediately.
2Replacing Light Bulbs
P. 312
High Beam
Indicator
●Comes on when the high beam headlights
are on. —
Lights On
Indicator
●Comes on whenever the light switch is on, or
in AUTO* when the exterior lights are on.
●If you remove the key from the ignition switch while
the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver's
door is opened.
Fog Light
Indicator*
●Comes on when the fog lights are on. —
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w, then goes off.
●Comes on when the passenger side airbag
system is automatically shut off.
●It does not mean there is a problem with your side
airbags.
●Comes on when nobody is sitting in the
passenger seat - Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.
●Comes on when someone is sitting in the seat -
Have the passenger sit properly.
U.S.
Canada
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 76 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
77
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Immobilizer
System Indicator
●Comes on briefly when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w, then goes off.
●Comes on if the immobilizer system cannot
recognize the key information.
●Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0, pull the key out, and then insert
the key and turn it to ON (w again.
●Repeatedly blinks - The system may be
malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
●Do not attempt to alter this system or add other
devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.
Security System
Alarm Indicator*
●Blinks when the security system alarm has
been set. 2Security System Alarm* P. 112
ECON Mode
Indicator
●Comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w, then goes off.
●Comes on when the ECON mode is on.
2ECON Button P. 125
Indicator
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 77 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
78
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
CRUISE MAIN
Indicator
●Comes on when you press the CRUISE
button. 2Cruise Control P. 265
CRUISE
CONTROL
Indicator
●Comes on if you have set a speed for cruise
control. 2Cruise Control P. 265
Washer Level
Indicator*
●Comes on when washer fluid gets low. ●Refill washer fluid.
2Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 308
Maintenance
Minder Indicator
●Comes on when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (w, then goes off.
●Comes on when the scheduled maintenance
is due soon.
2Maintenance Minder™ P. 289
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 78 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
79
Instrument Panel
Gauges and Displays
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators.
They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w.
Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.
■Speedometer
■Tachometer
■Fuel Gauge
■Temperature Gauge
1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE
You should refuel when the reading approaches .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from
the fuel gauge reading.
E
1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE
Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the
upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull
safely to the side of the road and allow engine
temperature to return to normal.
2Overheating P. 351
CR-V-31T0A600.book 79 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
80
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display
Instrument Panel
Information Display
The information display shows the odometer, trip meter, engine oil life and
maintenance service item codes, and other gauges.
Press the (SEL/RESET) knob to change the display.
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.
■Switching the Display
1Switching the Display
Each time you press the knob, the information
display changes as follows:
Some of the items on the information display also
appear on the multi-information display. They also
change along with the information display changes
while the fuel consumption is shown.
Instant Fuel Economy,
Average Fuel A, Trip Meter
A, Outside Temperature
Engine Oil Life
Instant Fuel Economy,
Average Fuel B, Trip Meter
B, Outside Temperature
Instant Fuel Economy,
Odometer, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature
Instant Fuel Economy,
Range, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature
■Odometer
CR-V-31T0A600.book 80 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 81
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display
Instrument Panel
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A
and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
■Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the knob. The trip meter is
reset to 0.0.
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100
km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the
average fuel economy is also reset.
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2Maintenance Minder™ P. 289
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your trips in the past.
Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed.
2Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 354
■Trip Meter
■Average Fuel Economy
■Engine Oil Life
■Range
■Check Fuel Cap
1Trip Meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the knob.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 81 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display
82
Instrument Panel
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
■Adjusting the outside temperature display
Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
■Outside Temperature
1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road
heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the
temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less
than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
Use the multi-information display's customized
features to correct the temperature.
2Customized Features P. 86
Models with multi-information display
CR-V-31T0A600.book 82 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
83
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
Continued
Instrument Panel
Multi-Information Display*
Shows useful information, such as audio status. It also displays the compass
direction* and clock.
Press the (display) button to change the display.
■Switching the Display
123456
Display
Button
Fuel consumption
Audio/HFL* display
Black screen
Full size analogue clock/
Wallpaper
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 83 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
84
Instrument Panel
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100
km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the
average fuel economy is also reset.
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your trips in the past.
Shows the time elapsed since the last time Trip A or Trip B was reset.
Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since the last time Trip A or Trip B was
reset.
■Average Fuel Economy
■Range
■Elapsed Time
■Average Speed
1Average Fuel Economy
You can choose an item to be displayed in the fuel
consumption screen. Range, elapsed time, or average
speed can be selected.
2Customized Features P. 86
CR-V-31T0A600.book 84 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 85
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
Instrument Panel
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2Maintenance Minder™ P. 289
Shows the vehicle's traveling direction.
2Compass* P. 243
Shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination linked with the
navigation system.
2Refer to the navigation system manual
■Engine Oil Life
■Compass Direction*
■Turn-by-Turn Directions*
1Turn-by-Turn Directions*
You can select whether the turn-by-turn display
comes on or not during the route guidance.
2Customized Features P. 86
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 85 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
86
Instrument Panel
Use the multi-information display to customize certain features.
■How to customize
Select the Vehicle Menu screen by pressing the MENU button while the ignition
switch is in ON (w, and the vehicle is at a complete stop. Select Customize
Settings, then press the SOURCE button.
■Customized Features
1Customized Features
To customize other features, press the (+ / (-
button.
2List of customizable options P. 89
2Example of customizing wallpapers P. 92
When you customize settings:
Shift to (P.
Button
Press to go to the next
display.
SOURCE Button
Press to set your selection.
MENU Button
Press to go to Vehicle Menu.
(+ Button
Press to scroll upwards.
Button
Press to go back to the
previous display.
(- Button
Press to scroll downwards.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 86 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
87
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
Continued
Instrument Panel
■Customization flow
Press the MENU button.
1Customized Features
You can exit the customizing screen at any time by
pressing the MENU button.
Vehicle Menu
Vehicle Information
Adjust Clock*
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 87 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
88
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
Instrument Panel
Customize Settings
Display Setup
Trip Computer Setup
Lighting Setup
Door Setup
Default All
Select Wallpaper
Language Selection
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Interior Light Dimming Time
Auto Light Sensitivity
Auto Door Lock
Security Relock Timer
Import Wallpaper
Delete Wallpaper
Trip Meter Item to Display
Welcome Screen
Color Theme
Turn by Turn Display*
Trip A reset trigger
Trip B reset trigger
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Door Lock Mode
Auto Door Unlock
Keyless Lock Acknowledgment
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 88 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
89
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
Continued
Instrument Panel
■List of customizable options
*1: Not available on all models
*2: Default Setting
*3: Refer to the navigation system manual for complete details.
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable settings
Vehicle
Information Maintenance info Reset the Maintenance MinderTM.No/Yes
Adjust Clock
*1
Sets time display 12 hour or 24 hour and adjust the time. 12 h*2/24 h
Customize
Settings
Display
Setup
Select
Wallpaper Select the full-size analogue clock or the wallpaper. Clock*2/Image 1/Image 2/
Image 3
Import
Wallpaper Import an image file for a new wallpaper.
Three images can be stored.
2Importing wallpapers
from USB P. 92
Delete
Wallpaper Delete an image file for a wallpaper. Image 1/Image 2/Image 3
Trip Meter
Item to
Display
Select an item to be displayed along with average
fuel economy. Range*2/Elapsed time/
Average speed
Welcome
Screen
Select whether the welcome screen comes on or not
when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w.On*2/Off
Color Theme Changes the color of the screen. Blue*2/Red/Amber/Gray
Turn by Turn
Display *1, *3
Select whether the turn-by-turn display comes on or
not during the route guidance. On*2/Off
Language
Selection Changes the displayed language. English*2/Francais/Español
CR-V-31T0A600.book 89 ページ ２０１１年７月１７日 日曜日 午後５時３２分
90
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
Instrument Panel
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable settings
Customize
Settings
Trip
Computer
Setup
Adjust
Outside Temp.
Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F (U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C
(Canada)
Trip A reset
trigger
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,
average fuel economy A, average speed A, and elapsed
time A.
With Refuel/Manual only*1/
IGN OFF
Trip B reset
trigger
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,
average fuel economy B, average speed B, and elapsed
time B.
With Refuel/Manual only*1/
IGN OFF
Fuel Efficiency
Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On*1/Off
Lighting
Setup
Interior Light
Dimming Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on
after you close the doors. 60sec/30sec*1/15sec
Headlight
Auto Off
Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on
after you close the driver’s door. 60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec
Auto Light
Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid/Low/Min*1
CR-V-31T0A600.book 90 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
91
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable settings
Customize
Settings
Door
Setup
Auto Door
Lock
Changes the setting for the automatic locking
feature.
Off/With Vehicle Speed*1/
Shift from (P
Door Lock
Mode
Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to unlock
on the first operation of the remote or ignition key. Driver Door*1/All Doors
Auto Door
Unlock
Changes the setting for when the doors unlock
automatically.
Off/
Driver Door with Shift to (P*1/
All Doors with Shift to (P/
Driver Door with IGN Off/
All Doors with IGN Off
Keyless Lock
Acknowledgment
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds. On*1/Off
Security
Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and
the security system to set after you unlock the
vehicle without opening any door.
90sec/60sec/30sec*1
Default
All
Cancels/Resets all the customized settings as
default.
Cancel
Reset All Defaults
CR-V-31T0A600.book 91 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
92
Instrument Panel
■Example of customizing wallpapers
You can customize the display from clock to wallpaper.
Importing wallpapers from USB
You can import up to three images, one at a time for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
Select Import Wallpaper from Customize Settings and properly connect a USB
flash drive to store an image.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the adapter
cable.
2USB Adapter Cable P. 157
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Select Customize Settings with the (+ /
(- button, then press the SOURCE button.
4. Select Display Setup with the (+ / (-
button, then press the SOURCE button.
1Customized Features
•When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a
folder cannot be imported.
•The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
•The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
•The maximum image size is 1,920 x 936 pixels. If
the image size was less than 480 x 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
•The number of files that can be selected is up to
255.
•Up to 64 characters can be displayed in the file
name.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 92 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
93
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
Continued
Instrument Panel
5. Select Import Wallpaper with the (+ / (-
button, then press the SOURCE button.
uThe file names are displayed on the
screen.
6. Press the (- button until the file name you
want to store appears on the center of the
display, then press the SOURCE button.
7. The preview of the imported data is
displayed. Press the SOURCE button if it is
OK.
8. Press the SOURCE button to save the
image file.
Save
CR-V-31T0A600.book 93 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
94
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
Instrument Panel
9. Select the location you want to store the
image file in with the (+ / (- button, then
press the SOURCE button.
10.Press the MENU button to exit the
customizing screen.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 94 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
95
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
Instrument Panel
Selecting a wallpaper
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Customize Settings with the (+ /
(- button, then press the SOURCE button.
3. Select Display Setup with the (+ / (-
button, then press the SOURCE button.
4. Select Select Wallpaper with the (+ / (-
button, then press the SOURCE button.
5. Select the image file you want with the
(+ / (- button, then press the SOURCE
button.
uWhen the scroll is stopped, the
thumbnail is displayed.
6. Press the MENU button to exit the
customizing screen.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 95 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
96
CR-V-31T0A600.book 96 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
97
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Setting the Clock ................................ 98
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................. 100
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside .......................................... 102
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside ............................................. 104
Childproof Door Locks ..................... 105
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 106
Opening and Closing the Tailgate... 110
Security System ................................ 112
Immobilizer System .......................... 112
Security System Alarm*.................... 112
Opening and Closing the Windows..... 114
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
*
...... 116
Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch................................. 117
Turn Signals..................................... 118
Light Switches.................................. 118
Fog Lights*...................................... 120
Daytime Running Lights ................... 120
Wipers and Washers ........................ 121
Brightness Control ........................... 123
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror*
Button ........................................... 124
ECON Button ................................... 125
Adjusting the Steering Wheel........... 125
Adjusting the Mirrors....................... 126
Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 126
Power Door Mirrors ......................... 127
Adjusting the Seats .......................... 128
Adjusting the Seat Positions............. 128
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience
Items ................................................ 138
Interior Lights .................................. 138
Interior Convenience Items .............. 139
Heating and Cooling System*......... 148
Using Vents, Heating and A/C.......... 148
Climate Control System*.................. 151
Using Automatic Climate Control .... 151
Automatic Climate Control Sensors . 154
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 97 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
98
Controls
Setting the Clock
Clock
You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch in ON (w.
■Using the MENU button
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Adjust Clock with the(+/ (-button, then press the SOURCE button.
3. Press the (+/ (- button to change the
setting between 12 H and 24 H.
4. Select hour or minute with the /
button.
5. Press the (+/ (- button to adjust the
numbers up or down.
6. Select Set with the / button, then
press the SOURCE button to enter your
selection.
uThe display will return to the Adjust
Clock display.
■Using the SETUP button
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Adjust Clock, then press .
3. Rotate to select the item you want to change (12/24 hour mode, hour,
minute). Then press .
4. Rotate to make the adjustment.
5. Press to enter your selection. The display returns to Adjust Clock. Repeat steps
4 to 6 to adjust other items.
6. To enter the selection, Rotate and select Set, then press .
7. Press the SETUP button to go back to the normal display.
1Clock
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
To set the time to the nearest hour:
Press and hold the CLOCK button until the clock
display begins to blink, then press the (6 (Reset)
button.
Depending on the displayed time, the clock sets
forward or backward.
Example:
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:53 will reset to 2:00
The clock is automatically updated through the
navigation system, so the time does not need to be
adjusted.
Models with navigation system
Models with multi-information display
CR-V-31T0A600.book 98 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
99
uuSetting the ClockuClock
Controls
You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch in ON (w.
■To set up the time
1. Press the SETUP button until ADJUST
HOUR appears.
2. Rotate to adjust the hours.
3. Press . The display switches to minute
adjustment.
4. Rotate to adjust the minutes.
5. Press to complete clock adjustment.
■To set up the clock mode
1. Press the SETUP button until CLOCK MODE appears.
2. Rotate to select mode, then press .
Models without multi-information display
CR-V-31T0A600.book 99 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
100
Controls
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following keys:
Use the keys to start and stop the engine, and
to lock and unlock all the doors and tailgate.
You can also use the remote transmitter to
lock and unlock the doors and tailgate.
■Master Keys
1Key Types and Functions
All of the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
2Immobilizer System P. 112
The keys contain precision electronics.
Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to
the electronics:
•Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
•Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
•Keep the keys away from liquids.
•Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the remote transmitter may not
work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 100 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
101
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions
Controls
Can be used to start and stop the engine, and
lock and unlock driver's door.
Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.
■Valet Key
1Valet Key
When you need to leave a key with a third party,
leave the valet key.
Gray
■Key Number Tag
1Key Number Tag
Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 101 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
102
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■Locking the doors
Press the lock button.
Once:
uSome exterior lights will flash, all the
doors and tailgate will lock, and the
security system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
uA beeper sounds and verifies the security
system is set.
■Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock button.
Once:
uSome exterior lights flash twice, and the
driver's door unlocks.
Twice:
uThe remaining doors and tailgate unlock.
■Using the Remote Transmitter
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
the doors will automatically relock.
You can change the relock timer setting.
2Customized Features P. 86
If the interior light switch is in the door activated
position, the interior lights come on when you press
the unlock button.
No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30
seconds.
Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off
immediately.
2Interior Lights P. 138
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door or
the tailgate is open.
If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is
probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2Replacing the Button Battery P. 330
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2Customized Features P. 86
Models with multi-information display
LED
Unlock
Button
Lock
Button
CR-V-31T0A600.book 102 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
103
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
Fully insert the key and turn it.
■Locking the driver's door
Push the lock tab forward a or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b, and close the door.
■Locking the passenger's doors
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
■Lockout prevention system
The doors and the tailgate cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch, and
any door or the tailgate is open.
■Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
When you lock the driver's door with a key, all of the
other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. When
unlocking, the driver's door unlocks first. Turn the
key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the
remaining doors and the tailgate.
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2Customized Features P. 86
Models with multi-information display
Lock
Unlock
■Locking a Door Without Using a Key
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver's door, all the other doors
and tailgate lock at the same time.
Make sure you have the key in your hand before
locking the door to prevent it from being locked in
the vehicle.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 103 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
104
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Controls
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
■Locking a door
Push the lock tab forward.
■Unlocking a door
Pull the lock tab rearward.
Pull the front door inner handle.
uThe door unlocks and opens in one
motion.
■Using the Lock Tab
1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, all the other doors and tailgate lock at
the same time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, only the driver's door will unlock.
To Unlock
Lock Tab
To Lock
■Unlocking Using the Inner Handle of Front Doors
1Unlocking Using the Inner Handle of Front Doors
The front door inner handles are designed to allow
front seat occupants to open the door in one motion.
However this feature requires that front seat
occupants never pull a front door inner handle while
the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where
childproof door locks are provided.
2Childproof Door Locks P. 105
Inner
Handle
CR-V-31T0A600.book 104 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
105
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks
Controls
Press the master door lock switch in as shown
to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate.
Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock tab.
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.
■When opening the door
Open the door using the outside door handle.
■Using the Master Door Lock Switch
1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock the either front door using the
master door lock switch, hatch, and fuel fill door all
the other doors lock/unlock at the same time.
To Unlock
Master Door
Lock Switch
To Lock
■Setting the Childproof Door Locks
1Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the
childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
handle.
Lock
Unlock
CR-V-31T0A600.book 105 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
106
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
Controls
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks all doors and unlocks the driver’s door automatically when a
certain condition is met.
■Drive lock mode
All doors and tailgate lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
■Park unlock mode
The driver’s door unlocks when the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake pedal
depressed.
■Auto Door Locking
■Auto Door Unlocking
1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the master door lock
switch.
2Customizing the Auto Door Locking/
Unlocking Setting* P. 107
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the multi-information
display.
2Customized Features P. 86
Models without multi-information display
Models with multi-information display
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 106 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
107
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*
Continued
Controls
Customizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*
You can customize the auto door locking/unlocking setting to your liking using the master door lock switch.
■Auto door locking
■Auto door unlocking
*1: Default setting
■List of the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Customizable Options
Mode Description
Drive Lock Mode*1 All doors and the tailgate lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
Park Lock Mode All doors and the tailgate lock when the shift lever is moved out of (P with the brake pedal depressed.
Off The auto door locking is deactivated all the time.
Mode Description
Park Unlock Mode
Driver’s door unlocks*1 All doors and the tailgate unlock
When the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake pedal depressed.
Ignition Switch Unlock
Mode
Driver’s door unlocks All doors and the tailgate unlock
When the ignition switch is moved out of ON (w.
Off The auto door unlocking is deactivated all the time.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 107 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
108
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*
Controls
*1: Default setting
■Customizing Flow for Auto Door Locking Options
Steps Drive Lock Mode*1 Park Lock Mode Off
1
Apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever out of (P with the
brake pedal depressed.
Apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever to (P.
Apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever to (P.
2The driver’s door must be closed at this stage. Open the driver’s door.
3Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
4
Press and hold the front of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door for more
than five seconds. Release the switch after you hear a click twice.
Press and hold the front of the master
door lock switch on the driver’s door for
more than five seconds. Release the switch
after you hear one click.
5Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q within 20 seconds.
uCustomization is completed.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 108 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
109
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*
Controls
*1: Default setting
■Customizing Flow for Auto Door Unlocking Options
Steps
Ignition Switch Unlock Mode Park Unlock Mode
Off
To unlock driver’s
door To unlock all doors To unlock driver’s
door*1 To unlock all doors
1
Apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever out of (P with the brake
pedal depressed.
Apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever to (P.
Apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever to (P.
2The driver’s door must be closed at this stage. Open the driver’s door.
3Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
4
Press and hold the rear of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door for more than five seconds. You will hear a click twice.
5Release the switch.
Keep pressing the switch
for another five seconds
to hear one more click.
Release the switch.
Keep pressing the switch
for another five seconds
to hear one more click.
Release the switch.
6Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q within 20 seconds.
uCustomization is completed.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 109 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
110
Controls
Opening and Closing the Tailgate
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or
closing it.
■Opening the tailgate
•Open the tailgate all the way.
uIf it is not fully opened, the tailgate may begin to close under its own weight.
•Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close.
■Closing the tailgate
Keep the tailgate closed while driving to:
uAvoid possible damage.
uPrevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 67
1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
Be careful not to put your hands between the tailgate
and the cargo area when closing the gate.
When you are storing or picking up luggage from the
cargo area while the engine is idling, do not stand in
front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned.
Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They
may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden
acceleration, or a crash.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 110 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
111
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuUsing the Tailgate Release Button
Controls
Using the Tailgate Release Button
When all the doors are unlocked, the tailgate
is unlocked. Press the tailgate release button
and lift open the tailgate.
To close the tailgate, grab the inner handle,
pull the tailgate down, and push it closed
from outside.
Tailgate
Release
Button
Inner Handle
CR-V-31T0A600.book 111 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
112
Controls
Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from
starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic
signals to verify the key.
Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch:
•Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch.
•Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
•Do not bring a key from another vehicle's immobilizer system near the ignition
switch.
Security System Alarm*
The security system alarm activates when the doors, tailgate, or hood are opened
without the key, or remote transmitter.
■When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently and all of the exterior lights flash.
■To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the key, or remote transmitter. The system, along with the
horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.
1Immobilizer System
NOTICE
Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in
theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the ignition key with you whenever you
leave the vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
1Security System Alarm*
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
minutes until the security system deactivates.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 112 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
113
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm*
Controls
■Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
•The ignition switch is in LOCK (0, and the key has been removed from the
ignition switch.
•The hood and tailgate are closed.
•All doors are locked with the key or the remote transmitter.
■When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the
blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system alarm is set.
■To cancel the security system alarm
The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the key or
remote transmitter, or the ignition switch is turned to ON (w. The security system
alarm indicator goes off at the same time.
■The panic button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
•The horn sounds.
•Some exterior lights flash.
■Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
■Panic Mode
1Security System Alarm*
Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
•Unlocking the door with the lock tab or the master
door lock switch.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may go off
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add another
device to it.
Panic
Button
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 113 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
114
Controls
Opening and Closing the Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON
(w, using the switches on the doors. The driver side switches can be used to open
and close all of the windows.
The power window lock button on the driver side must be switched off (not pushed
in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the
driver's seat.
When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you
can only operate the driver's window. Turn the power window lock button on when
children are in the vehicle.
■Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.
■Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly.
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
■Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function*
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it will stop closing and reverse
direction.
The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
3
WARNING
Closing a power window on someone's
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
ON
OFF
Power Window
Lock Button
Indicator
Driver’s
Window
Switch
Front Passenger’s
Window Switch
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 114 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
115
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Controls
To open: Push the switch down.
To close: Pull the switch up.
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
■
Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function
Close
Open
CR-V-31T0A600.book 115 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
116
Controls
Opening and Closing the Moonroof*
You can only operate the moonroof when the ignition switch is in ON (w. Use the
switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
■Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly, then
release.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then
release.
The moonroof will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
touch the switch briefly.
■Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
■Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then
release.
■Opening/Closing the Moonroof
1Opening/Closing the Moonroof
NOTICE
Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.
3
WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone's hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
Open
Close Tilt
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 116 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
117
Controls
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch
1Ignition Switch
You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is
in (P.
If you open the driver's door when the key is in LOCK
(0 or ACCESSORY (q, a warning buzzer will sound
to remind you to take the key out.
If the key won't turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY
(q, turn the key while moving the steering wheel left
and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing
the key to turn.
(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this
position.
(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.
(w ON: This is the position when driving.
(e START: This position is for starting the engine.
The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of
the key.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 117 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
118
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
Controls
Turn Signals
The turn signals can be used when the ignition
switch is in ON (w.
Light Switches
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
and off, regardless of the position of the
ignition switch.
■High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
■Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to
return to low beams.
■Flashing the high beams
Pull the lever back, and release it.
Right Turn
Left Turn
■Manual Operation
1Light Switches
If you remove the key from the ignition switch while
the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2Lights On Indicator P. 76
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
because it will cause the battery to discharge.
High Beams
Flashing the high beams
Low Beams
Turns on parking, side marker,
tail, and rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking, side
marker, tail, and rear license plate
lights
CR-V-31T0A600.book 118 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
119
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
Controls
Automatic lighting control can be used when
the ignition switch is in ON (w.
When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the
headlights and other exterior lights will switch
on and off automatically depending on the
ambient brightness.
uYou can change the auto light sensitivity
setting.
2Customized Features P. 86
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off
within 15 seconds after you remove the key and close the driver's door.
uYou can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
2Customized Features P. 86
If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 with the headlight switch on, but do not
open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the
AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver's door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.
■Automatic Lighting Control*
1Automatic Lighting Control*
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
The light sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
work properly.
Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting The exterior lights come on
when the ambient light is at
MAX
HIGH
MID
LOW
MIN
Light Sensor
Bright
Dark
■Automatic Lighting Off Feature
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 119 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
120
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights*
Controls
Fog Lights*
When the low beam headlights are on, turn
the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.
Daytime Running Lights
The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following
conditions have been met:
•The ignition switch is in ON (w.
•The headlight switch is off, or in .
•The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition
switch will turn off the daytime running lights.
The high beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight
switch is turned on.
1Fog Lights*
When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
They go off when the headlights turn off, or when
the daytime running lights are on.
2Fog Light Indicator* P. 76
Fog Light Switch
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 120 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
121
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Continued
Controls
Wipers and Washers
The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the ignition switch is in ON (w.
■MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.
■Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI)
Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.
■Adjusting the delay*
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
delay.
■Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever, the wipers make
two or three more sweeps before stopping.
■Front Wiper/Washer
1Wipers and Washers
NOTICE
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.
NOTICE
In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
windshield, becoming stuck.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the
windshield, then turn the wipers on.
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the
wipers make a single sweep.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s
shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become
the same.
Models with intermittent time adjustment ring
Intermittent Time
Adjustment Ring*
MIST
INT: Low speed with
intermittent
OFF
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull to
use
washer.
Long delay
Short delay
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 121 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
122
Controls
The rear wiper and washer can be used when
the ignition switch is in ON (w.
■Wiper switch (OFF, INT, ON)
Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.
■Washer ( )
Sprays while you rotate the switch to this
position.
Hold it to activate the wiper and to spray the
washer. Once released, it stops operating
after a few more sweeps.
■Operating in reverse
When you shift the transmission to (R with the front wiper activated, the rear wiper
operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off.
■Rear Wiper/Washer
1Rear Wiper/Washer
If the wiper stops operating due to any obstacle such
as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe
place.
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition
switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 , then remove
the obstacle.
The wiper motor is equipped with a breaker that may
stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an
overload. Wiper operation will return to normal
within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to
normal.
INT: Intermittent
OFF
ON: Continuous wipe
Washer
Front Wiper Position Rear Wiper Operation
INT (Intermittent) Intermittent
LO (Low speed wipe)
HI (High speed wipe) Continuous
CR-V-31T0A600.book 122 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
123
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
Controls
Brightness Control
When the parking lights are turned on and the
ignition switch is in ON (w, you can use the
brightness control knob to adjust instrument
panel brightness.
Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.
Dim: Turn the knob to the left.
You will hear a beeper when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. The
information display will return to its original
state several seconds after you adjust the
brightness.
■Brightness level indicator
The brightness level is shown on the
information display while you are adjusting it.
1Brightness Control
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on
whether the exterior lights are on or off. The
instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are
on.
Pressing the (SEL/RESET) knob switches the
display.
If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness
display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels
the reduced instrument panel brightness when the
exterior lights are on.
Control Knob
CR-V-31T0A600.book 123 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
124
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button
Controls
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window
and mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 20 minutes.
However, if the outside temperature is -8°C or
below, they do not automatically switch off.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
However, if the outside temperature is 0°C or
below, they do not automatically switch off.
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to damage the heating wires.
It is critical to wipe the window from side to side
along the defogger heating wires.
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged.
Also, do not use the system for a long period when
the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery,
making it difficult to start the engine.
Models with heating and cooling system
Models with climate control system
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 124 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
125
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluECON Button
Controls
ECON Button
The ECON button turns the ECON mode on
and off.
The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel
economy by adjusting the performance of the
engine, transmission, air conditioning system,
and cruise control.
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up.
uThe steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.
uMake sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.
3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
down to lock the steering wheel in position.
uAfter adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
Make any steering wheel adjustments before you
start driving.
3
WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
To adjust
To lock Lever
CR-V-31T0A600.book 125 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
126
Controls
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.
Flip the tab to switch the position.
The night position will help to reduce the glare
from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.
When driving after dark, the automatic
dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare
from headlights behind you. Press the auto
button to turn this function on and off. When
activated, the auto indicator comes on.
■Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions*
1Adjusting the Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 128
Tab
Daytime
Position
Night Position
Up
Down
■Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*
Indicator Auto Button
Sensor
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*
The auto dimming function cancels when the shift
position is in (R.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 126 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
127
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
Controls
Power Door Mirrors
You can adjust the door mirrors when the
ignition switch is in ON (w.
■Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.
The driver side door mirror has outer and inner
segments.
The outer segment is slightly curved to provide
a wider angle view than a standard flat mirror.
This wider view may help you check areas that
are not visible using a standard door mirror.
Selector
Switch
Adjustment
Switch
■Expanded View Driver's Mirror
Inner Segment
Outer Segment
1Expanded View Driver's Mirror
Objects visible in the outer segment of the driver side
door mirror appears smaller than objects in the rest of
the mirror. But in fact, they are closer than they
appear.
Do not rely on your mirrors. Always look to the side
and behind your vehicle before changing lanes.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 127 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
128
Controls
Adjusting the Seats
Adjusting the Seat Positions
Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately press the pedals without leaning
forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger's seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.
■Adjusting the front power seat*
1Adjusting the Seats
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
3
WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
Move back.
Allow sufficient
space.
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Height Adjustment
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Driver side only
Lumbar Support
Adjustment
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 128 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 129
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
Controls
■Adjusting the front manual seat(s)
1Adjusting the front manual seat(s)
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
forth to make sure it is locked in position.
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Pull up on the bar to move the
seat, then release the bar.
Height Adjustment
(Driver side only)
Pull up or push down the lever
to raise or lower the seat.
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Pull up the lever to
change the angle.
Driver’s seat is shown.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 129 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
130
Controls
Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.
The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
■Adjusting the Seat-Backs
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back.
Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.
3
WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 130 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 131
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
Controls
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints
in all seating positions.
Head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rear-
impact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant's head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant's ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.
■Adjusting the front head restraint positions
To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint: Push it down
while pressing the release button.
■Adjusting the Head Restraints
1Adjusting the Head Restraints
For a head restraint system to work properly:
•Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
•Do not place any object between an occupant and
the seat-back.
•Install each restraint in its proper location.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.
Position head in the center
of the head restraint.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 131 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
132
Controls
A passenger sitting in a center back seating
position should adjust the height of their head
restraint to an appropriate position before the
vehicle begins moving.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove the head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
restraint up and out.
To reinstall the head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.
■Changing the Rear Center Seat Head Restraint Position
■Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
3
WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.
Front and rear center headrestraints
CR-V-31T0A600.book 132 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
133
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
Continued
Controls
A passenger in an outer back seating position
should use the upright head restraint before
the vehicle begins moving.
To fold down the head restraint:
Pull the strap.
To put the head restraint back in the
upright position:
Pull up the head restraint and push rearward
until it latches.
■Folding Down the Rear Outer Head Restraint
Strap
CR-V-31T0A600.book 133 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
134
Controls
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
■Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
3
WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 134 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
135
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
Continued
Controls
Rear Seats
Separately fold down the left and right halves of the rear seat to make room for
cargo.
■To fold down the seat
1. Store the center seat belt first. Insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the
anchor buckle.
2. Retract the seat belt into the holder on the ceiling.
2Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 36
3. Lower the center head restraint to its lowest position. Put the armrest back into
the seat-back.
4. Pull the release strap.
4. Pull the release lever.
■Folding Down the Rear Seats
1Folding Down the Rear Seats
Remove any items from the rear seat cushion and
floor before you fold down the rear seat.
When you fold down one side of the rear seats and
use the non-recessed part of the cargo area, make
sure to secure the cargo. Loose items can fly forward
and cause injury if you have to brake hard.
Make sure all items in the cargo area or items
extending to the rear seats are properly
secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have
to brake hard.
Pull
From the rear door side
Lever
From the cargo area side
CR-V-31T0A600.book 135 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
136
Controls
■To return the seat to the original
position
1. Pull up the seat-back in the upright
position.
2. Pull up the seat cushion in the original
position.
3. Put back the head restraints in the original
position.
Pull the lever on the right to change the angle
of the right half of the seat-back, and left for
the left half.
■Rear Seat-back Adjusting
1To return the seat to the original position
Make sure the seat is latched before driving.
If the seat-back is not completely lowered, it does not
securely latch when returned to the upright position.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 136 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
137
uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest
Controls
Armrest
Pull down the armrest.
Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back.
■Using the Front Seat Armrest*
■Using the Rear Seat Armrest
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 137 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
138
Controls
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
■ON
The interior lights come on regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:
•When any of the doors are opened.
•You unlock the driver's door.
•You remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Only the cargo area light comes on when the
tailgate is opened.
■OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses.
■Interior Light Switches
1Interior Light Switches
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade
out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are
closed.
The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following
situations:
•When you unlock the driver's door but do not open
it.
•When you remove the key from the ignition switch
but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.
2Customized Features P. 86
The interior lights go off immediately in the following
situations:
•When you lock the driver's door.
•When you close the driver's door with the key in
the ignition switch.
•When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
If you leave any of the doors open without the key in
the ignition switch, the interior lights go off after
about 15 minutes.
Models with multi-information display
Door Activated Position
Off
Front
Door Activated Position
On
Off
Rear and Cargo Area
■Map Lights
1Map Lights
When the interior light switch is in the door activated
position and any door is open, the map light will not
go off when you press the lens.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 138 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
139
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Continued
Controls
Interior Convenience Items
Pull the handle to open the glove box. You
can lock the glove box with the master key.
Slide the lid using the release knob to open or
close the console compartment.
■Glove Box
1Glove Box
3
WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.
Glove Box
To Lock
■Console Compartment
CR-V-31T0A600.book 139 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
140
Controls
■Front seat beverage holders
Are located in the console between the front
seats.
■Rear seat beverage holders
Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat
beverage holders.
■Beverage Holders
1Beverage Holders
NOTICE
Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 140 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 141
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
The accessory power sockets can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY
(q or ON (w.
■Accessory power socket (console panel)
Open the cover to use it.
■Accessory power socket (console
compartment)*
Open the console lid and the cover to use it.
■Accessory Power Sockets
1Accessory Power Sockets
NOTICE
Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 120
watts or less (10 amps).
To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket
with the engine running.
When both sockets are being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories should not exceed
120 watts (10 amps).
Models with rear accessory power socket
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 141 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
142
Controls
There is a coat hook on the rear left grab
handle. Pull it down to use it.
Use the cargo side net to secure items to the
side.
■Coat Hook
1Coat Hook
The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy
items.
■Cargo Side Net
CR-V-31T0A600.book 142 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 143
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
Use floor cargo hooks to secure luggage in the
cargo area.
There are also hooks on both sides of the
cargo area.
■Cargo Hooks
1Cargo Hooks
NOTICE
Do not hang a large object or an object that weighs
more than 6lbs (3kg) on the side cargo hooks.
Hanging heavy or large objects may damage the
hooks.
Hooks
Hooks
Hook
CR-V-31T0A600.book 143 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
144
Controls
To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release the indent. To close, push it again until
it latches.
You can store eyeglasses and other small
items in this holder.
■Conversation mirror
The sunglasses holder comes with a mirror.
Open the sunglasses holder fully, then push it
back to the first detent.
You can use the mirror to view the rear seats.
■Sunglasses Holder
1Sunglasses Holder
Keep the holder closed while driving except when
accessing stored items.
Push
CR-V-31T0A600.book 144 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 145
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
The ignition switch must be in ON (w to use
the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats
faster than the LO setting.
There is no heater in the passenger's seat-
back due to the side airbag cutoff system.
While in HI, the heater cycles on and off.
uThe appropriate indicator will be on
while the seat heater is on. Briefly press
the switch on the opposite side to turn
the heater off. The indicator will be off.
When a comfortable temperature is
reached, select LO to keep the seat
warm.
■Seat Heaters*
1Seat Heaters*
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off.
3
WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 145 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
146
Controls
The tonneau cover can be used to conceal
your parcels and protect them from direct
sunlight.
■To extend:
Pull the handle on the center edge, then clip
the mounting rods in the hooks on both sides
of the hatch opening.
■To retract:
Slip the rods out of the hooks, then slowly roll
it back until it is completely retracted.
■To remove:
Push either end of the housing inward, then
lift it out of its position.
■Tonneau Cover*
1Tonneau Cover*
Do not access parcels in the cargo area while driving.
This may cause injury if you have to brake hard.
Do not stack objects higher than the top of the seat
in the cargo area. They could block your view and be
thrown about the vehicle during a sudden stop.
To prevent tonneau cover damage:
•Do not place items on the tonneau cover.
•Do not put weight on the tonneau cover.
Handle
Mounting Rod
Hook
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 146 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
147
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
■To store:
The housing unit can be stored on the cargo
area floor to make more space available.
Push one end of the unit into the hole on one
side panel, then insert the other end into the
hole on the other side.
After storing the unit, rock it up and down to
make sure it is securely placed.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 147 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
148
Controls
Heating and Cooling System*
Using Vents, Heating and A/C
Mode Buttons
Change airflow.
Floor and defroster vents
Floor vents
Dashboard and floor vents
Dashboard vents
Fan Control Dial
Adjusts the fan speed.
Rotate the dial all the
way to OFF to turn
everything off.
Button
Turns on the A/C, selects airflow
from the dashboard vents, and
switches the mode to recirculation.
A/C Button
Press to cool the interior or
dehumidify while heating.
Windshield Defroster Button
Turns on the A/C, selects airflow from
the defroster vents at the base of the
windshield, and switches the mode to
fresh air.
Temperature
Control Dial
Adjusts the interior
temperature.
(Recirculation) Button
Press the button and switch the mode
depending on environmental conditions.
Recirculation Mode (indicator on):
Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior
through the system.
Fresh Air Mode (indicator off):
Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system
in fresh air mode in normal situations.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 148 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 149
uuHeating and Cooling System*uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C
Controls
The heater uses heat from the engine coolant
to warm the air.
1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control
dial.
2. Select .
3. Adjust the temperature using the
temperature control dial.
4. Press the button (the indicator off).
■To rapidly warm up the interior
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Select .
3. Set the temperature to maximum heat.
4. Press the button (the indicator on).
■To dehumidify the interior
When used in combination with the heater, the air conditioning system makes the
interior warm and dry and can prevent the windows from fogging up.
1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control dial.
2. Press the A/C button to turn on the air conditioning.
3. Select .
4. Adjust the temperature using the temperature control dial.
■Heating
1Heating
When you select , the mode automatically
switches to fresh air.
1To rapidly warm up the interior
Change to fresh air mode as soon as the interior gets
warm enough. The windows may fog up if kept in
recirculation mode.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 149 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuHeating and Cooling System*uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C
150
Controls
1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control
dial.
2. Select .
3. Adjust the temperature using the
temperature control dial.
4. Press the A/C button (the indicator on).
■To rapidly cool down the interior
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Set the temperature to maximum cool.
3. Press the button (the indicator on).
Pressing the button turns the air
conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.
■To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Press the button.
3. Press the button.
4. Set the temperature to maximum heat.
■Cooling
1To rapidly cool down the interior
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows.
While in the ECON mode, the system has greater
temperature fluctuations.
Pressing the button bypasses the ECON mode
control, and cools down the interior more rapidly.
■Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode.
If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the
windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes
visibility.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 150 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
151
Continued
Controls
Climate Control System*
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that will as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference.
Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver's side or passenger's side control
dial.
3. Press the button to cancel.
■Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Press the button and switch the mode depending on environmental conditions.
Recirculation Mode (indicator on) : Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior
through the system.
Fresh Air Mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate
control system in AUTO, the function of the button
that was pressed will take priority.
The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button that was pressed will be
controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may not start immediately when the AUTO
button is pressed.
Once you have set the desired temperature, do not
use the temperature control switches more than
necessary.
Doing so may delay the time it takes to reach the set
temperature.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on AUTO, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Pressing the button switches the climate
control system between on and off. When turned on,
the system returns to your last selection.
While in the ECON mode, the system has greater
temperature fluctuations.
Floor and
defroster vents
Floor ventsDashboard and
floor vents
Dashboard vents
AUTO Button
Driver's Side
Temperature
Control Dial
Passenger's Side
Temperature
Control Dial
/ (Fan Control) Buttons
(Recirculation) Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 151 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuClimate Control System*uUsing Automatic Climate Control
152
Controls
Pressing the button turns the air
conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.
Pressing the button again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.
■To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Press the button.
2. Press the button.
■Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode.
If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the
windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes
visibility.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 152 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
153
uuClimate Control System*uSynchronized Mode
Controls
Synchronized Mode
You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger
side in synchronized mode.
1. Press the SYNC button.
uThe system will switch to synchronized mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using driver’s side temperature control dial.
Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.
1Synchronized Mode
When you press the button, the system changes
to synchronized mode.
When the system is in dual mode, the driver side
temperature and the passenger side temperature can
be set separately.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 153 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
154
uuClimate Control System*uAutomatic Climate Control Sensors
Controls
Automatic Climate Control Sensors
The automatic climate control system is
equipped with a sunlight sensor, an interior
temperature and humidity sensor. Do not
cover or spill any liquid on them.
Sunlight Sensor
Temperature and
Humidity Sensor
CR-V-31T0A600.book 154 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
155
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features on models without the navigation system.
Audio System
About Your Audio System................ 156
USB Adapter Cable .......................... 157
Auxiliary Input Jack*........................ 157
Audio Antenna ................................ 158
Audio System Theft Protection ......... 158
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 159
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 160
Playing the AM/FM Radio ................. 161
Playing a CD .................................... 163
Playing an iPod®............................... 167
Models without multi-information display
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 170
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 173
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 174
Playing the AM/FM Radio................. 175
Playing the XM® Radio*................... 178
Playing a CD .................................... 180
Playing an iPod®............................... 183
Playing Pandora®............................. 186
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 188
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 191
Models with multi-information display
Rear Entertainment System*........... 193
Audio Error Messages ...................... 205
Audio Remote Controls.................... 209
General Information on the Audio
System ............................................. 210
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*
Using HFL ........................................ 214
HFL Menus ...................................... 216
Compass*.......................................... 243
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 155 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
156
Features
Audio System
About Your Audio System
On models with navigation system, see the Navigation System Manual for operation
of the audio system, Bluetooth®HandsFreeLink®, and voice commands for these
features.
The audio system features AM/FM radio. It can also play audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC
files, iPods®, and USB flash drives. You can operate the audio system from the
buttons and switches on the panel, or the remote controls on the steering wheel.
The audio system features AM/FM radio and the XM® Radio* service. It can also play
audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, iPods®, iPhone®, USB flash drives, and Bluetooth®
devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, or
the remote controls on the steering wheel.
1About Your Audio System
XM® Radio is available on a subscription basis only.
For more information on XM® Radio, contact a
dealer.
2General Information on the Audio System
P. 210
XM® Radio is available in the United States and
Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
XM® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio, Inc.
Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not
supported.
iPod® is a registered trademark owned by Apple Inc.
MP3 and AAC are standard audio compression
formats. WMA is an audio compression format
developed by Microsoft Corporation.
Models without multi-information display
Models with multi-information display
Remote Control
iPod®
USB Flash
Drive
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 156 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
157
uuAudio SystemuUSB Adapter Cable
Features
USB Adapter Cable
1. Unclip the USB connector and loosen the
adapter cable.
2. Install the iPod® dock connector or the USB
flash drive to the USB connector.
Auxiliary Input Jack*
Use the jack to connect standard audio devices.
1. Open the AUX cover.
2. Connect a standard audio device to the
input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo
miniplug.
uThe audio system automatically switches
to the AUX mode.
1USB Adapter Cable
•Do not leave the iPod® or USB flash drive in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
•Do not use an extension cable with the USB
adapter cable.
•Do not connect the iPod® or USB flash drive using a
hub.
•Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
•We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
•Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod®, try
reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
reboot, follow the manufacturer's instructions
provided with the iPod® or visit www.apple.com/
ipod.
1Auxiliary Input Jack*
To switch the mode, press any of the audio mode
buttons. You can return to the AUX mode by
pressing the AUX button.
You cannot use the auxiliary input jack if you replace
the audio system.
State or local laws may limit the circumstances in
which you can launch or control your attached audio
device.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 157 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
158
uuAudio SystemuAudio Antenna
Features
Audio Antenna
Your vehicle is equipped with a removable
antenna at the rear of the roof.
Audio System Theft Protection
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead.
■Reactivating the audio system
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w, and turn on the audio system.
uIf you turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q, you will be requested to
enter the audio security code. See step 3.
2. Press and hold the power button again for more than two seconds.
uThe audio system is reactivated when the system’s control unit recognizes that
the system is in your vehicle.
If the control unit fails to recognize, ENTER CODE appears on the audio
display*/multi-information display*.
3. Enter the audio security code using the preset buttons. If you enter an incorrect
digit, continue to the last digit, then try again. If you do not enter the code
correctly after 10 tries, leave the system for one hour before trying again, or visit
a dealer to have the system reset.
1Audio Antenna
NOTICE
Before using a ‘‘drive-through’’ car wash, remove the
antenna by unscrewing it by hand. This prevents the
antenna from being damaged by the car wash
brushes.
1Audio System Theft Protection
Find the audio system's security code and serial
number label in your owner’s manual kit.
We recommend that you write down the serial
number in this owner’s manual.
Do not store the label in your vehicle. If you lose the
label, you must first retrieve the serial number, and
then obtain the code.
You can find out about your serial number and
security code from a dealer.
You can register the security code at Owner Link
(owners.honda.com.), and find information on how
to retrieve the serial number and obtain the code at
radio-navicode.honda.com.
U.S. models
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 158 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
159
Features
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or
ON (w.
Use the selector knob or SETUP button to
access some audio functions.
Press to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection.
SETUP button: Press to select any mode such
as the Auto Select (A.SEL), Radio Data System
(RDS), Play Mode, Adjust Clock, or the Title
Display.
button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
Models without multi-information display
1Audio System Basic Operation
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Press the SOURCE, (+, (-, or button on the
steering wheel to change any audio setting.
2Audio Remote Controls P. 209
SETUP Menu Items
2Auto Select (A.SEL) P. 162
2Radio Data System (RDS) P. 162
2Play Mode P. 165
2Adjust Clock P. 98
Button
Selector
Knob
SETUP
Button
Menu Display
Selector knob can be scrolled
to the direction(s).
CR-V-31T0A600.book 159 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
160
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Features
Adjusting the Sound
Press the button, and rotate to adjust
the setting.
Each time you press the button, a sound
mode switches as follows.
1Adjusting the Sound
When the adjustment level reaches the center, you
will see C in the display.
The SVC has four modes: OFF, LOW, MID, and
HIGH.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
Button
Selector
Knob
BASS is selectable.
Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation
CR-V-31T0A600.book 160 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
161
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
Continued
Features
Playing the AM/FM Radio
FM Button
/ Buttons
Press to display and select an
RDS category.
SCAN Button
Press to sample each of the
strongest stations on the
selected band for 10 seconds.
To turn off scan, press the
button again.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a
band, then press the preset button.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press to search up and down
the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.
SETUP Button
Press to select Auto Select (A.SEL) or
Radio Data System (RDS).
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to tune the radio
frequency.
AM Button
Press to select a band.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 161 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
162
Features
Use the auto select feature to scan both bands and store the strongest station in
each preset.
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Press to enter the auto select mode.
uThe system goes into scan mode for several seconds.
To turn off auto select, press again. This restores the presets you originally set.
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.
■RDS INFO ON
Press the SETUP button twice then press while listening to an RDS capable
station. The station name is displayed. To turn off the RDS information, press
again.
■To find an RDS station from your selected program category
1. Press the / button to display and
select an RDS category.
2. Use SEEK/SKIP or SCAN to select an RDS
station.
■Auto Select (A.SEL)
■Radio Data System (RDS)
1Playing the AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2Audio Remote Controls P. 209
You can store six AM stations and twelve FM stations
into the preset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you
store six stations each.
A.SEL function scans and stores up to six AM stations
and twelve FM stations with a strong signal into the
preset button memory.
If you do not like the stations auto select has stored,
you can manually store your preferred frequencies.
1Radio Data System (RDS)
The display shows up to 16 characters of text data.
RDS Category
CR-V-31T0A600.book 162 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
163
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Continued
Features
Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs in either MP3 or WMA
format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.
/ Buttons
Press to change folders (MP3
or WMA).
SCAN Button
You will get a 10-second
sampling of each song.
●Press to sample all tracks
on the CD (all files in the
current folder in MP3 or
WMA).
●Press two times to sample
the first file in each of the
main folders (MP3 or
WMA).
●To turn off scan, press and
hold the button.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press or to change
tracks (files in MP3 or WMA).
SETUP Button
Press to select Play Mode or Title
Display.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to change tracks/
files or select an item, then press
to set your selection.
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.
CD Button
Press to play a CD.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 163 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
164
Features
1. Press to switch the display to a folder list.
2. Rotate to select a folder.
3. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
■How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
(MP3/WMA)
1Playing a CD
NOTICE
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays UNPLAYABLE, then skips
to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
•When you select a new folder, file, or track.
•When you change the audio mode to CD.
•When you insert a CD.
The display shows up to 16 characters of text data.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
Track Selection
Folder
Selection
CR-V-31T0A600.book 164 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 165
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Features
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a track or file.
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
■To turn off a play mode
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select NORMAL PLAY, then press .
■How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Press the button to go back to the previous
display, and press the SETUP button twice to cancel
this setting mode.
Play Mode Menu Items
NORMAL PLAY
RPT ONE TRK: Repeats the current track/file(s).
RPT ONE FLD : Repeats all files in the
current folder.
RDM IN DISC: Plays all tracks/files in random order.
RDM IN FLD : Plays all files in the current
folder in random order.
MP3/WMA
MP3/WMA
Play Mode
Items
CR-V-31T0A600.book 165 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
166
Features
You can select an item to be shown on the display if the CD was recorded with text
data.
1. Press the SETUP button twice.
2. Rotate to select a title display mode,
then press .
■How to Select a Title Display
1How to Select a Title Display
Press the button to go back to the previous
display, and press the SETUP button to cancel this
setting mode.
Title Display Mode Menu Items
NORMAL: Track number
: File number and folder number
FOLDER : Folder name
FILE : File name
ALBUM: Album name
TRACK: Track name
ARTIST: Artist name
MP3/WMA
MP3/WMA
MP3/WMA
Title Display Mode
CR-V-31T0A600.book 166 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
167
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
Continued
Features
Playing an iPod®
Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then press
the AUX button.
2USB Adapter Cable P. 157
/ Buttons
Press to go back to the
previous display.
Press to set your selection.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press or to change
songs.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
AUX Button
Press to select iPod® (if connected).
CR-V-31T0A600.book 167 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
168
Features
1. Press to display the iPod® menu.
2. Rotate to select a menu.
3. Press to display the items on that menu.
4. Rotate to select an item, then press .
■How to Select a File from the iPod® Menu
1Playing an iPod®
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio display.
2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 206
iPod® Menu
CR-V-31T0A600.book 168 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
169
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
Features
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
■To turn off a play mode
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select NORMAL PLAY, then press .
■How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
NORMAL PLAY
SHUFFLE OFF: Turns off the shuffle mode.
SHUFFLE: Plays all available files in a selected list
(playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or
composers) in random order.
SHUFFLE ALBUMS: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
REPEAT OFF: Turns off the repeat mode.
REPEAT ONE TRACK: Repeats the current track.
Play Mode
Items
CR-V-31T0A600.book 169 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
170
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB adapter cable, then press the AUX button.
2USB Adapter Cable P. 157
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes® are playable on this unit.
/ Buttons
Press to skip to the next
folder, and to skip to the
beginning of the previous
folder.
SCAN Button
You will get a 10-second
sampling of each file.
●Press to sample all files in
the current folder.
●Press two times to sample
the first file in each of the
main folders.
●To turn off scan, press and
hold the button.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press or to change files.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to select an item, then
press to set your selection.
AUX Button
Press to select USB flash drive
(if connected).
CR-V-31T0A600.book 170 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 171
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
1. Press to switch the display to a folder list.
2. Rotate to select a folder.
3. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
■How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2General Information on the Audio System
P. 210
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) are not played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio display.
2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 206
Folder Selection
Track Selection
CR-V-31T0A600.book 171 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
172
Features
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file.
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
■To turn off a play mode
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select NORMAL PLAY, then press .
■How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
NORMAL PLAY
REPEAT ONE TRACK: Repeats the current file.
REPEAT ONE FOLDER: Repeats all files in the current
folder.
RANDOM IN FOLDER: Plays all files in the current
folder in random order.
RANDOM ALL: Plays all files in random order.
Play Mode
Items
CR-V-31T0A600.book 172 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
173
Features
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or
ON (w.
Use the selector knob or SETUP button to
access some audio functions.
Press to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection.
SETUP button: Press to select any mode such
as the Auto Select, RDS Information, Sound
Settings, Play Mode, Resume/Pause*, or Adjust
Clock.
button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
Models with multi-information display
1Audio System Basic Operation
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Press the SOURCE, (+, (-, or button on the
steering wheel to change any audio setting.
2Audio Remote Controls P. 209
SETUP Menu Items
2Auto Select P. 176
2RDS information P. 177
2Sound Settings P. 174
2Play Mode P. 182
2Resume/Pause P. 192
2Adjust Clock P. 98
Button
Selector
Knob
SETUP
Button
Menu Display
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 173 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
174
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Features
Adjusting the Sound
Press the SETUP button, and rotate to
select Sound Settings, then press . Rotate
to scroll through the following choices:
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: OFF, LOW, MID, and
HIGH.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
Selector
Knob
SETUP
Button
TREBLE is selectable.
Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation
Subwoofer*
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 174 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
175
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
Continued
Features
Playing the AM/FM Radio
FM Button
/ Buttons
Press to display and select an
RDS category.
SCAN Button
Press to sample each of the
strongest stations on the
selected band for 10 seconds.
To turn off scan, press the
button again.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a
band, then press the preset button.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press to search up and down
the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to tune the radio
frequency.
AM Button
Press to select a band.
FM/AM Button*
Press to select a band.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 175 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
176
Features
Use the auto select feature to scan both bands and store the strongest station in
each preset.
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Auto Select, then press
.
To turn off auto select, press again. This
restores the presets you originally set.
■Auto Select
1Playing the AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2Audio Remote Controls P. 209
You can store six AM stations and twelve FM stations
into the preset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you
store six stations each.
Auto Select function scans and stores up to six AM
stations and twelve FM stations with a strong signal
into the preset button memory.
If you do not like the stations auto select has stored,
you can manually store your preferred frequencies.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 176 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
177
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
Features
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.
■RDS information
1. Press the SETUP button and rotate to
select RDS Information.
2. Each time you press , the RDS
Information switches between on and off.
■To find an RDS station from your selected program category
1. Press the / button to display and
select an RDS category.
2. Use SEEK/SKIP or SCAN to select an RDS
station.
■Radio Data System (RDS)
RDS Category
CR-V-31T0A600.book 177 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
178
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio*
Features
Playing the XM® Radio*
/ Buttons
Press to skip to the next
category, and to skip to
the previous category.
(XM®) Button
Press to select XM® Radio.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press or to previous or
next channel.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to select channels.
Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a channel:
1. Tune to the selected channel.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored channel, select
XM, then press the preset button.
SCAN Button
Press to sample all channels (in the
channel mode), or channels within a
category (in the category mode).
Each sampling continues for a few
seconds. Press SCAN again to cancel
scanning and continue listening to
the channel.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 178 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
179
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio*
Features
1. Press the button to select the XM® radio band (XM1 or XM2).
2. Press the SETUP button, rotate to select MODE/CATEGORY or MODE
CHANNEL. Each time you press , the mode switches between them. Press the
button to enter the setting.
3. Select a channel using the TUNE ( ), SKIP, / , SCAN, or Preset buttons.
1. Press to display a channel list.
2. Rotate to select a channel, then press
.
■To Play the XM® Radio
■To Select a Channel from a List
1Playing the XM® Radio*
In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
You can store twelve XM® stations in the preset
buttons. XM1 and XM2 let you store six stations
each.
There may be instances when XM® Radio does not
broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This
does not indicate a problem with your audio system.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 179 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
180
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Features
Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3 or WMA
format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.
/ Buttons
Press to skip to the next
folder, and to skip to the
beginning of the previous
folder in MP3 or WMA.
SCAN Button
You will get a 10-second
sampling of each song.
●Press to sample all tracks
on the CD (all files in the
current folder in MP3 or
WMA).
●Press two times to sample
the first file in each of the
main folders (MP3 or
WMA).
●To turn off scan, press and
hold the button.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press or to change
tracks (files in MP3 or WMA).
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
CD Button
Press to play a CD.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 180 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 181
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Features
1. Press to switch the display to a folder list.
2. Rotate to select a folder.
3. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
■How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
(MP3/WMA)
1Playing a CD
NOTICE
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unsupported, then skips
to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
•When you select a new folder, file, or track.
•When you change the audio mode to CD.
•When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
Folder Selection
Track Selection
CR-V-31T0A600.book 181 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
182
Features
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a track or file.
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press
.
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
■To turn off a play mode
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
3. Rotate to select Normal Play, then press .
■How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Press the button to go back to the previous
display, and press the SETUP button to cancel this
setting mode.
Play Mode Menu Items
Normal Play
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current track/file(s).
Repeat One Folder : Repeats all files in
the current folder.
Random in Folder : Plays all files in the
current folder in random order.
Random All: Plays all tracks/files in random order.
MP3/WMA
MP3/WMA
Play Mode
Items
CR-V-31T0A600.book 182 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
183
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
Continued
Features
Playing an iPod®
Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then press
the AUX button.
2USB Adapter Cable P. 157
/ Buttons
Press to go back to the
previous display.
Press to set your selection.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press or to change songs.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
AUX Button
Press to select iPod® (if connected).
Album Art
USB Indicator
Comes on when an iPod® is
connected.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 183 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
184
Features
1. Press to display the iPod® menu.
2. Rotate to select a menu.
3. Press to display the items on that menu.
4. Rotate to select an item, then press .
■How to Select a File from the iPod® Menu
1Playing an iPod®
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the multi-information display.
2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 206
iPod® Menu
CR-V-31T0A600.book 184 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 185
uuAudio System Basic Operationu
Features
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press
.
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
■To turn off a play mode
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
3. Rotate to select Normal Play, then press .
■How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Normal Play
Shuffle Off: Turns off the shuffle mode.
Shuffle: Plays all available files in a selected list
(playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or
composers) in random order.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Repeat Off: Turns off the repeat mode.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current track.
Play Mode
Items
CR-V-31T0A600.book 185 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
186
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®
Features
Playing Pandora®
Activate Pandora®, and connect the iPhone® using your dock connector to the USB
adapter cable, then press the AUX button.
2USB Adapter Cable P. 157
U.S. models
iPhone® use only
/ Buttons
Press to the next
station.
Press to the previous
station.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
SKIP Button
Press to skip a song.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob
Press to enter PANDORA MENU.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to select an item, then
press to set your selection.
AUX Button
Press to select iPhone® (if connected
when the Pandora® application is
activated).
Album Art
Rating Icon
CR-V-31T0A600.book 186 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
187
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®
Features
You can operate some of the Pandora menu items from your vehicle’s audio system.
The available items are:
•Station List (QuickMix is also available)
•Like
•Dislike
•Resume/Pause
•SKIP
•Bookmark this song
•Bookmark this artist
■Operating a menu item
1. Press to display the PANDORA MENU.
2. Rotate to select a menu.
3. Press to display the items on that menu.
■Pandora® Menu
1Playing Pandora®
Pandora® is a personalized Internet radio service that
selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user
enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your iPhone®. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.
1Pandora® Menu
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the multi-information display.
2Pandora® P. 207
You can skip the song or select Dislike only a
predetermined number of times in an hour.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 187 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
188
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB adapter cable, then press the AUX button.
2USB Adapter Cable P. 157
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes® are playable on this unit.
/ Buttons
Press to skip to the next
folder, and to skip to the
beginning of the previous
folder.
SCAN Button
You will get a 10-second
sampling of each file.
●Press to sample all files in
the current folder.
●Press two times to sample
the first file in each of the
main folders.
●To turn off scan, press and
hold the button.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press or to change files.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to select an item, then
press to set your selection.
AUX Button
Press to select USB flash drive
(if connected).
USB Indicator
Comes on when a USB flash drive
is connected.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 188 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 189
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
1. Press to switch the display to a folder list.
2. Rotate to select a folder.
3. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
■How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2General Information on the Audio System
P. 210
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) are not played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the multi-information display.
2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 206
Folder Selection
Track Selection
CR-V-31T0A600.book 189 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
190
Features
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file.
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press
.
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
■To turn off a play mode
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
3. Rotate to select Normal Play, then press .
■How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Normal Play
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file.
Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the current
folder.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder
in random order.
Random All: Plays all files in random order.
Play Mode
Items
CR-V-31T0A600.book 190 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
191
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Continued
Features
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and linked to the vehicle's
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2Phone Setup P. 221
Models with Bluetooth®HandsFreeLink®
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
You can find an approved phone by visiting
www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or by calling the
HandsFreeLink® consumer support at (888) 528 -
7876. In Canada, visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call
(888) 528 -7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the
audio system on
and off.
SETUP Button
Press to display
menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the
volume.
Press to display the
device’s name.
AUX Button
Press to select
Bluetooth® Audio.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press or to
change files.
Bluetooth Indicator
Comes on when
your phone is
connected to HFL.
Preset 1 Button
Press to switch the
mode between
pause and resume.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 191 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
192
Features
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
linked to HFL.
2. Press the AUX button.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-
compatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may be already linked.
■To pause or resume a file
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Resume/Pause, then press .
Each time you press , the setting switches between Pause and Resume.
Press the (pick-up) button on the steering
wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio
is playing.
2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®* P. 214
Press the (hang-up/back) button to end
the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.
■To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input
jack, you may need to press the AUX button
repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
■Switching to HFL
1Switching to HFL
If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the
pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.
Button
Button
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 192 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
193
Continued
Features
Rear Entertainment System*
Allows the rear passengers to enjoy a different entertainment source, such as DVD
and CD, than the front passengers.
The rear seat passengers can listen to audio from the rear entertainment system by
a wireless headphone that comes with your vehicle.
To turn on the switch: Pivot the left
earpiece outward.
To adjust the volume: Turn the dial at the
bottom of the right earpiece.
If you want to listen to the audio from the rear
entertainment system on the speakers, press
the AUX button and change to the AUX
mode.
■Wireless Headphone
Optional for U.S.
1Rear Entertainment System*
NOTICE
This vehicle’s overhead mounted video display, if so
equipped, includes mercury-containing components.
Upon removal, please reuse, recycle, or dispose of as
hazardous waste.
The system also allows for auxiliary inputs from
standard video games. The jacks are in the console
compartment.
V = Video jack
L = Left audio jack
R = Right audio jack
VL R
Auxiliary Input Jacks
1Wireless Headphone
Wear the headphone correctly with the earpiece
marked with L goes to your left ear and R goes to
your right ear. Wearing the headphone backward
may affect the audio reception.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 193 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
194
Features
Pull down the screen to the first or second
detent until it latches.
Operating the System
To operate the system, turn the ignition switch to ON (w or ACCESSORY (q. Press
the REAR POWER button to turn on the system (the indicator on).
■Overhead Screen
1Overhead Screen
NOTICE
This vehicle's overhead mounted video display, if so
equipped, includes mercury-containing components.
Upon removal, please reuse, recycle, or dispose of as
hazardous waste.
Open
Button
Overhead
Screen
CR-V-31T0A600.book 194 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
195
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
Continued
Features
■Control Panel in the Console Compartment
Play/Pause Button
Press to pause the CD/DVD.
Press again to resume.
REAR CTRL OFF Button
Press to cancel the operation from
the rear seat.
CD/DVD Slot
AUX VIDEO Jack
You can connect other audio or
videos.
SOURCE Button
Press to change the source DVD or
AUX. The indicator comes on for
the selected source.
REAR POWER Button
Press to turn the rear
entertainment system on and
off.
(CD/DVD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD/DVD.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 195 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
196
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
Features
■System Controls and Menus for DVD
TITLE Button
Press to display the status of the
DVD that is currently playing.
Use , , , or to highlight
a menu item, and press the ENT
button to make a selection.
(Power) Button
Press to turn on the system.
CANCEL Button
Press to go back to the previous
display or operation.
SKIP Buttons
Press or to change
chapters.
Stop Button
Press to stop a DVD.
DVD Button
Press to
watch a DVD.
AUX Button
Press to access AUX mode.
The following options appear when you play a
DVD and press the MENU button.
Top Menu
Menu
Play Mode
Search
Subtitle
Audio
Angle
Chapter
Title
OFF
NumInput
Repeat
Chapter
Title
Return
The following options
appear when you play a
DVD and press the SETUP
button:
Disp Adjust
Aspect Ratio
Language
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Color
Tint
Normal
Wide
Zoom
Full
Rewind Button
Press and hold to reverse to
chapters.
Fast-forward Button
Press and hold to fast forward to
chapters.
Play/Pause Button
Press to pause the DVD. Press
to again resume.
Reset
MENU Button
SETUP Button
CR-V-31T0A600.book 196 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 197
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
Features
■Playing a DVD
•Insert a DVD into the slot in the console compartment.
uThe system automatically starts the DVD.
•To fast forward, press and hold the fast-forward button, and to rewind, press and
hold the rewind button on the remote.
•To go to the next chapter, press the (SKIP) button, and to go to the beginning
of the current chapter, press the button on the remote. Quickly press the
button twice to go to the previous chapter.
■TITLE button on the remote
Press the TITLE button while the DVD is playing to see the current status of title,
chapter, elapsed time, angle, subtitle, audio, and sound characteristics.
■MENU button on the remote
Press the MENU button while the DVD is
playing to see the available options. Use the
and buttons to highlight the option and
then press the ENT button.
1Playing a DVD
DVD is available for the rear seat passengers only.
1TITLE button on the remote
Press the TITLE button again to return.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 197 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
198
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
Features
Top Menu:
The top page of the DVD’s title menu appears. The title menu also appears when
you press the MENU button while the DVD is in the slot not playing. Press the
CANCEL or MENU button to return.
Menu:
The DVD’s title menu appears.
Play Mode:
You can change the following three settings:
Audio - Select a language for audio that is available on the DVD. The sound
characteristics (Dolby Digital, LPCM, MPEG Audio, etc) of that audio is also
displayed.
Subtitle - Select a subtitle that is available on the DVD.
Angle - Select a view angle that is available on the DVD. If the DVD currently playing
does not carry multiple angles, only one option Angle 1 comes on. Press the
CANCEL or MENU button to return.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 198 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
199
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
Continued
Features
Search:
You can search for a DVD segment from the following methods.
Title Search - Select the title you want to play.
Chapter Search - Select the chapter you want to play.
NumInput:
Enter a two digit number, if issued to the DVD, to find the segment you want to start
to play.
1. Select NumInput to go to the number input screen.
2. Use the , , , and buttons to input numbers.
uIf you want to delete a number, select DEL.
3. The cursor automatically goes to ENT after you input two digits. Press the ENT
button to enter.
Repeat:
Highlight this option and press the ENT button to change the repeat mode from
chapter repeat and title repeat, to repeat off.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 199 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
200
Features
■SETUP button on the remote
Press the SETUP button while the DVD is
playing to see the available options. Use the
and buttons to highlight the option and
then press ENT.
Disp Adjust:
You can adjust the overhead screen’s Brightness, Contrast, Black Level, Color,
and Tint. To return to the default display setting, select Reset.
After you make all the adjustments, the screen goes back to the top SETUP screen,
or press the CANCEL button to return.
Aspect Ratio:
You can select the screen mode with a different aspect ratio from Normal, Wide,
Zoom, and Full. After you select the mode, it takes about one second to return to
the play mode with the selected ratio.
Language:
You can select the display language from English, French, and Spanish.
1SETUP button on the remote
Some DVD formats do not allow for some of the
setting adjustments.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 200 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 201
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
Features
Initial Settings -
Press the SETUP button to configure the initial Language, Dynamic Range, and
Angle Mark settings before playing a DVD.
Language Settings:
Select the language for the DVD’s displayed menus (Menu Language), the DVD’s
audio (Audio Language), and the DVD’s subtitle (Subtitle Language).
1. Select the language setting.
2. Select the language from English, French, Spanish, Arabic, German, Italian,
Dutch, Chinese, Korean, Thai, Japanese, and other.
3. If you select other, you need to enter the four digit language code to configure
the language that is not listed. Select Yes to go to the number input screen.
uTo return to the Language Settings screen, select No.
4. Press the ENT button each time you input a digit.
uIf you want to delete a number, select DEL.
5. The cursor automatically goes to ENT after you input four digits. Press the ENT
button to command.
Dynamic Range:
This feature reduces the difference between the loud and quiet sound levels. Select
ON or OFF.
Angle Mark:
You can select whether to display the angle mark appearing in the upper right
corner of the screen when you change the view angle while the DVD is playing.
Select ON or OFF.
When the DVD is not playing
1SETUP button on the remote
Initial Settings:
The prior language varies by disc. You may not be
able to configure your selected language setting.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 201 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
202
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
Features
■System Controls and Menus for CD
Play/Pause Button
Press to pause the CD. Press to
again resume.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system ON and OFF.
DVD Button
Press to listen
to a CD.
TITLE Button
Press to scroll titles on CD.
Use , , , or to
highlight a menu item, and
press the ENT button to make
a selection.
CANCEL Button
Press to go back to the
previous operation. Disp Adjust
Language
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Appearance
Black
Blue
Brown
White
Red
The following options
appear when you play
a CD and press the
SETUP button:
SKIP Buttons
Press or to change tracks.
Rewind Button
Press and hold to reverse to
track. Fast-forward Button
Press and hold to fast
forward to track.
SETUP Button
Reset
CR-V-31T0A600.book 202 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
203
uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
Features
■Playing a CD
Press the DVD button.
The available options appear on the overhead screen are Repeat, Random, and Scan.
These functions are the same as those of the playing a DVD.
2Playing a DVD P. 197
To scroll your audio data title, press the TITLE button for five seconds.
■SETUP button on the remote
Press the SETUP button while the CD is
playing to see the available options. Use the
and buttons to highlight the option and
then press ENT.
Disp Adjust:
You can adjust the overhead screen’s Brightness, Contrast, and Black Level. To
return to the default display setting, select Reset.
After you make all the adjustments, the screen goes back to the top SETUP screen,
or press the CANCEL button to return.
Appearance:
You can select the screen color from blue, black, white, brown, and red.
Language:
You can select the display language from English, French, and Spanish.
1System Controls and Menus for CD
You can also insert an audio CD compatible with the
system, or recorded in MP3/WMA/AAC formats into
the slot and play.
2Playable Discs P. 204
CR-V-31T0A600.book 203 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
204
uuRear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
Features
Playable Discs
The discs that come with these labels can be
played in your vehicle’s rear entertainment
system.
Also look for the region code of 1 or ALL on
the package or jacket on the disc.
DVD-ROMs are not playable in this unit.
However, the audio data, such as MP3, WMA
and AAC music files, on a DVD-ROMs can be
played.
1Playable Discs
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by U.S. patents and
other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home
and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 204 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
205
Features
Audio Error Messages
CD Player
If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
Error Message Cause Solution
HEAT ERROR High temperature ●Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.
UNPLAYABLE/ Unsupported Track/file format not supported ●Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file
plays automatically.
BAD DISC PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS MANUAL PUSH
EJECT Mechanical error
●Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the
error message is cleared.
●Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
disc again.
2Protecting CDs P. 212
●If the error message reappears, press the button, and pull out
the disc.
●Insert a different disc.
If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.
●If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,
contact a dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
MECH ERROR
BAD DISC PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS MANUAL Servo error
CHECK DISC Disc error ●Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
2Protecting CDs P. 212
CR-V-31T0A600.book 205 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
206
uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod®/USB Flash Drive
Features
iPod®/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod® or USB flash drive, you may see the
following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message Solution
USB Error Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the
USB adapter unit.
Bad USB Device Please
Check Owners Manual.
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system
off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
No Song Appears when the iPod® is empty. Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported Ver Appears when an unsupported iPod® is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod® is connected,
update the iPod® software to the newer version.
Retry Connection Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod®. Reconnect the iPod®.
Unplayable File Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message
appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.
No Data Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
drive. Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 206 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
207
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®
Features
Pandora®
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message Solution
PANDORA No Station Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to create a station.
PANDORA Unsupported Ver. Appears when Pandora version is not supported. Please update the device application.
PANDORA No Service Appears when Pandora is performing system maintenance. Try again later.
PANDORA Check Device Appears when Pandora is unable to play music. Check your device.
Pandora Loading Appears when Pandora is loading.
U.S. models
Models with multi-information display
CR-V-31T0A600.book 207 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
208
uuAudio Error MessagesuDVD Player Error Messages
Features
DVD Player Error Messages
Error Message Cause Solution
Disc Error FOCUS Error Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc. Check for an error indication.
Insert the disc again. If the code does not disappear or the disc cannot be
removed, consult a dealer.
MECH Error Mechanical Error
Region Error Invalid region code The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the disc, and insert a disc compatible
with this system.
Heat Error High temperature Turn the system off and allow the player to cool down until the error message
is cleared.
Format Error Track/file format not
supported
Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file plays
automatically.
Models with rear entertainment system
CR-V-31T0A600.book 208 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
209
Features
Audio Remote Controls
Allows you to operate the audio system while driving.
SOURCE Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FM1 FM2 AM XM1*XM2*CD AUX
(+ (- (Volume) Buttons
Press (+: Increases the volume.
Press (-: Decreases the volume.
Buttons
•When listening to the radio
Press : Selects the next preset radio station.
Press : Selects the previous preset radio station.
•When listening to a CD, iPod®, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio*
Press : Skips to the next song.
Press : Goes back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
•When listening to Pandora®*
Press : Skips to the next song.
Press and hold : Selects the previous station.
Press and hold : Selects the next station.
1Audio Remote Controls
The CD mode appears only when a CD is loaded.
When in the AUX mode, the following are operable
from the remote controls:
•iPod®/USB flash drive connected to the USB
adapter cable
•Bluetooth® Audio (with some phones only)
Button
SOURCE Button
Button
(+ Button
(- Button
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 209 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
210
Features
General Information on the Audio System
XM® Radio Service*
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in
the display: Turn the selector knob until 0 appears.
2. Have your radio ID and credit card number ready, and either call or visit the XM®
website to subscribe.
Press the (XM®) button and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the
service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.
LOADING:
XM® is loading the audio or program information.
OFF AIR:
The channel is not currently broadcasting.
UPDATING:
The encryption code is being updated. Channels 0 and 1 still work normally.
NO SIGNAL:
The signal is too weak in the current location.
--------:
No such channel exists, the channel is not part of your subscription, or the artist or
title information is unavailable.
ANTENNA:
There is a problem with the XM® antenna. Contact a dealer.
■Subscribing to XM® Radio
■Receiving XM® Radio
■XM® Radio Display Messages
1Subscribing to XM® Radio
Contact Information for XM® Radio:
US: XM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or (800) 852-
9696
Canada: XM® Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or (877)
209-0079
1Receiving XM® Radio
The XM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;
therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause
satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are
more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you travel from the
equator.
You may experience reception problems under the
following circumstances:
•In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
•In tunnels
•On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
•Large items carried on the roof rack
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 210 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
211
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs
Continued
Features
Recommended CDs
•Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use.
•Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed.
•Play only standard round-shaped CDs.
•Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
•Some versions of MP3 or WMA formats may be unsupported.
1Recommended CDs
A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded
under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not
play either.
■CDs with MP3 or WMA files
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 211 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs
212
Features
■Protecting CDs
Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs:
•Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.
•When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.
•Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.
•Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.
•Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.
•Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
•Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.
1Protecting CDs
NOTICE
Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside
and damage the audio unit.
Examples:
●Damaged CDs
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
With Label/
Sticker
Using
Printer Label
Kit
Sealed With Plastic Ring
●Poor quality
CDs
Chipped/
Cracked
Warped Burrs
●Small CDs
3-inch
(8-cm)
CD
●Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
excessively thick CDs
CR-V-31T0A600.book 212 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
213
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives
Features
Compatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives
•Use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher.
•Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
•Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
•Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
•Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
■iPod® Model Compatibility
Model
iPod classic ® 80GB/160GB
iPod classic ® 120GB
iPod classic ® 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod ® (5th generation)
iPod nano ®
iPod touch ®
iPhone ® 3GS
iPhone ® 4
■USB Flash Drives
1iPod® Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.
1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 213 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
214
Features
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*
For models with the navigation system, see Navigation System Manual for how to
operate the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®.
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle's audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen or to answer an
incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(TALK) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .
■HFL Buttons
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
•U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
(888) 528-7876.
•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call (888)
528 -7876.
Voice control tips
•Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
•Press and release the button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak
clearly and naturally after a beep.
•If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
•To change the volume level, use the audio system's
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
steering wheel.
Models with navigation system
Models without navigation system
TALK Button
Volume up Microphone
Hang-up/Back Button
Pick-up
Button Volume
down Selector
Knob
PHONE
Button
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 214 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
215
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uUsing HFL
Features
The multi-information display notifies you
when there is an incoming call.
Certain manual functions are disabled or
inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You
cannot select a grayed-out option until the
vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries can
be called using voice commands while the
vehicle is in motion.
2Speed Dial P. 231
■HFL Status Display
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Bluetooth® name and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is
under license. Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
Signal Strength
HFL Mode
Battery Level Status
Roam Status
Call Name
Bluetooth Indicator
Comes on when your
phone is connected to HFL.
■Limitations for Manual Operation
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the multi-
information display varies between phone models.
You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2Customized Features P. 86
Disabled Option
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 215 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
216
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
Features
HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w to use HFL.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.
Display your speed dial entry lists.
(up to 15 entries per paired phone)
Display the last 20
outgoing calls.
Display the last 20
incoming calls.
Display the last 20
missed calls.
Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
Enter a phone number to dial.
or
PHONE
Phone
Speed Dial*1
Call History*1
Phonebook*1
Dial*1
Dialed Calls
Received Calls
Missed Calls
CR-V-31T0A600.book 216 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
217
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
System reads received message aloud, or
stop message from being read.
Reply to a received message using one
of six fixed phrases.
Make a call to the sender.
See an entire received message (if more
than three lines of text).
Redial*1
Text Message
Read/Stop reading
Reply
Call
Display Message
Select message and .
Message is read
aloud
CR-V-31T0A600.book 217 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
218
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
Features
Pair a phone to the system.
Connect a phone to the system.
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Delete a previously paired phone.
Create a code for a paired phone.
Connection
Phone Setup
Add a New Phone
Connect a Phone
Disconnect Phone
Delete a Phone
Pairing Code
CR-V-31T0A600.book 218 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
219
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Select a phone number from the
phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Add New
Existing entry list
Select a phone number from the call history
to store as a speed dial number.
Enter a phone number to store as a speed
dial number.
Change a previously stored speed dial
number.
Delete a previously stored speed dial
number.
Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Change a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Speed Dial*1
Phonebook
Call History
Phone Number
Change Speed Dial
Delete Speed Dial
Store Voice Tag
Change Voice Tag
Delete Voice Tag
CR-V-31T0A600.book 219 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
220
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
Features
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter
the vehicle.
Prioritize the caller’s name as the caller ID.
Prioritize the caller’s phone number as the
caller ID.
Create a security PIN for a paired phone.
Turn incoming text message notifications on or off.
Passcode*1
Auto Transfer
Caller ID Info
Text Message Notice
Name Priority
Number Priority
System Clear
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, and security
codes.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 220 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 221
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
Features
■To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
uHFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
3. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
uIf your phone doesn’t appear, select
Phone Not Found? and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
4. HFL gives you a four-digit pairing code to
input on your phone.
When your phone prompts you, input the
four-digit pairing code.
5. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
■Phone Setup
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
•You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
•Your phone must be in the discoverable or search
mode when pairing the phone. Refer to your
phone's manual.
•Up to six phones can be paired.
•Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
•If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and returns to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 221 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
222
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
Features
■To pair a cell phone (when a phone has
already been paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
uIf a prompt appears asking to connect to
a phone, select No and proceed with
step 2.
3. Rotate to select Connection, then press
.
4. Rotate to select Add a New Phone,
then press .
uThe screen changes to Select Location.
5. Rotate to select Empty, then press .
CR-V-31T0A600.book 222 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
223
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
5. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
uHFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
6. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
uIf your phone doesn’t appear, select
Phone Not Found? and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
7. HFL gives you a four-digit pairing code to
input on your phone.
When your phone prompts you, input the
four-digit pairing code.
8. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 223 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
224
Features
■To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Connection, then press
.
4. Rotate to select Pairing Code, then
press .
5. Rotate to select Fixed or Random, then
press .
1To change the pairing code setting
The default pairing code is “0000” until you change
the setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 224 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
225
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■To delete a paired phone
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
uRepeat the procedure to select
Connection, then Delete a Phone.
3. Rotate to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .
4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
uYou will receive a notification on the
screen if it is successful.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 225 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
226
Features
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Text Message Notice,
then press .
4. Rotate to select a mode you want, then
press .
■To Set Up a Text Message Notice Option
1To Set Up a Text Message Notice Option
ON: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new text message.
OFF: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 226 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 227
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
Features
You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
uRepeat the procedure to select
Passcode.
3. Select a phone you want to add a security
PIN to.
uRotate to select a phone you want to
add a security PIN to, then press .
4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen.
uRotate to select Yes, then press .
5. Enter a new four-digit number.
uRotate to select, then press . Press
to delete. Press to enter the
security PIN.
6. Re-enter the four-digit number.
uThe screen returns to the screen in step
2.
■To Create a Security PIN
1To Create a Security PIN
In the phone is already security PIN protected, you
need to enter the current security PIN before clearing
the PIN or creating a new one.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 227 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
228
Features
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
uRepeat the procedure to select Auto
Transfer.
3. Rotate to select On, then press .
4. You will receive a notification on the screen
if the change is successful.
You can select a caller’s information to be displayed when you have an incoming
call.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
uRepeat the procedure to select Caller ID
Info.
3. Rotate to select a mode you want, then
press .
4. You will receive a notification on the screen
if the change is successful.
■Automatic Transferring
■Caller’s ID Information
1Caller’s ID Information
Name Priority mode: A caller’s name is displayed if it
is stored in the phonebook.
Number Priority mode: A caller’s phone number is
displayed.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 228 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
229
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
Security codes, paired phones, all stored voice tags, all speed dial entries, and all
imported phonebook data are erased.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
uRepeat the procedure to select System
Clear.
3. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
4. You will receive a notification message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
5. You will receive a notification message on
the screen. Rotate to finish.
■To Clear the System
CR-V-31T0A600.book 229 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
230
Features
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are
automatically imported to HFL.
■Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
If a name has four or more numbers, “∙∙∙“ appears
instead of category icons.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Pref
Home
Mobile
Work
Pager
Car
Fax
Message
Other
Voice
CR-V-31T0A600.book 230 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 231
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
Features
Up to 15 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
uRepeat the procedure to select Speed
Dial, then Add New.
3. Rotate to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
By Phonebook:
uSelect a number from the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
By Call History:
uSelect a number from the call history.
By Phone Number:
uInput the number manually.
4. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Rotate to select Yes or No,
then press .
5. Using the button, follow the prompts to
say the name for the speed dial entry.
■Speed Dial
1Speed Dial
You can use the audio preset buttons during a call to
store a speed dial number:
1. Press and hold the desired audio preset button
during a call.
2. The contact information for the active call will be
stored for the corresponding speed dial.
When a voice tag is stored, you can press the
button and call the number using voice commands.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 231 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
232
Features
■To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
uRepeat the procedure to select Speed
Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate to select Store Voice Tag, then
press .
5. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
■To delete a voice tag
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
uRepeat the procedure to select Speed
Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate to select Delete Voice Tag,
then press .
uYou will receive a confirmation message
on the screen. Rotate to select Yes,
then press .
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”
CR-V-31T0A600.book 232 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 233
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
Features
■To delete a speed dial number
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
uRepeat the procedure to select Speed
Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate to select Delete Speed Dial,
then press .
uYou will receive a confirmation message
on the screen. Rotate to select Yes,
then press .
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.
■Making a Call
1Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen.
Press the button and wait for a beep before
giving a command.
The maximum range between your phone and
vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 233 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
234
Features
■To make a call using the imported
phonebook
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook are automatically imported to
HFL.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then press
.
3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Rotate to select the initial, then press
.
4. Rotate to select a name, then press .
5. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
uDialing starts automatically.
■To make a call using a phone number
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Dial, then press .
3. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
4. Rotate to select , then press .
uDialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored speed dial number
using voice commands.
2Limitations for Manual Operation P. 215
2Speed Dial P. 231
1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored speed dial number
using voice commands.
2Limitations for Manual Operation P. 215
2Speed Dial P. 231
CR-V-31T0A600.book 234 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 235
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
Features
■To make a call using redial
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Redial, then press .
uDialing starts automatically.
■To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by Dialed Calls,
Received Calls, and Missed Calls.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Call History, then press
.
3. Rotate to select Dialed Calls, Received
Calls, or Missed Calls, then press .
4. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
uDialing starts automatically.
■To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
3. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
uDialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)
1To make a call using a speed dial entry
On the Phone screen, the first six speed dials on the
list can be directly selected by pressing the
corresponding audio preset buttons (1-6).
Select More Speed Dial Lists to view another paired
phone’s speed dial list.
When a voice tag is stored, you can press the
button and call the number using voice commands.
2Speed Dial P. 231
CR-V-31T0A600.book 235 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
236
Features
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming Call screen appears.
Press the button to answer the call.
Press the button to decline or end the call.
■Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Press the button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the current
call.
Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer
it.
Press the button if you want to hang up the
current call.
HFL Mode Caller Name
CR-V-31T0A600.book 236 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 237
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
Features
The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven
phone system.
1. To view the available options, press the
PHONE button.
2. Rotate to select the option, then press
.
uThe check box is checked when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
■Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 237 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
238
Features
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as 20 of the most recently
received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud
and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text message.
2. Rotate to select Yes to listen to the
message, then press .
uThe text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, press
the button.
■Receiving a Text Message
1Receiving a Text Message
The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
Only the most recent 20 text messages are displayed.
Only the first three lines of the received message are
displayed with this option.
2Displaying an entire message P. 242
CR-V-31T0A600.book 238 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 239
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
Features
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Text Message, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a message, then press
.
uThe text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
■Displaying Messages
1Displaying Messages
The icon appears next to an unread message.
Only the first three lines of the received message are
displayed with this option.
2Displaying an entire message P. 242
If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 239 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
240
Features
■Using the stop reading or read option
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Text Message, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a message, then press
.
uThe text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
4. Press to enter the Text Message Menu.
5. Rotate to select Stop Reading or Read,
then press .
1Using the stop reading or read option
This option changes to:
•Stop Reading while the text message is read out.
Select this option to discontinue the message read-
out.
•Read when you go to the Text Message menu, or
after you selected Stop Reading. Select this option
to hear the system reading out the selected
message.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 240 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 241
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
Features
■Reply to a message
You can reply to a message using one of the
six common phrases available in the system.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Text Message, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a message, then press
.
uThe text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
4. Press to enter the Text Message Menu.
5. Rotate to select Reply, then press .
6. Rotate to select the reply message, then
press .
7. The reply message you selected is displayed.
Select Yes to send the message.
1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
•Talk to you later, I'm driving.
•I am on my way.
•I'm running late.
•OK
•Yes
•No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
After you reply, the following is displayed:
CR-V-31T0A600.book 241 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
242
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®*uHFL Menus
Features
■Making a call to a sender
You can call the text message sender.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select to Text Message, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a message, then press
.
uThe text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
4. Press to enter the Text Message Menu.
5. Rotate to select Call, then press .
uHFL begins dialing.
■Displaying an entire message
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select to Text Message, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a message, then press
.
uThe text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
4. Press to enter the Text Message Menu.
5. Rotate to select Display Message,
then press .
6. Rotate to scroll down and display the
entire message.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 242 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
243
Features
Compass*
When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, the compass self-calibrates, and the
compass display appears.
Compass Calibration
If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need
to manually calibrate the system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
2. Press and hold the SETUP button until the
display shows the compass setting menu.
3. Rotate to select Calibration, then press
.
4. When the display changes to Calibration
Start, press .
5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles.
uThe compass starts to show a direction
after the calibration. The CAL indicator
goes off.
1Compass*
Compass operation can be affected under the
following conditions:
•Driving near power lines or stations
•Crossing a bridge
•Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large
object that can cause a magnetic disturbance
•When accessories such as antennas and roof racks
are mounted by magnets
Compass Setting Menu Items
1Compass Calibration
Calibrate the compass in an open area.
While setting the compass:
•The button returns to the previous screen.
•The SETUP button cancels the setting mode.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 243 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
244
uuCompass*uCompass Zone Selection
Features
Compass Zone Selection
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
2. Press and hold the SETUP button until the
display shows the compass setting menu.
3. Rotate to select Zone, then press .
The display shows the current zone
number.
4. Rotate to select the zone number of
your area (See Zone Map), then press .
Zone Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
78
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Zone Map
Guam Island : Zone 8
Puerto Rico : Zone 11
1Compass Zone Selection
The zone selection is done to compensate the
variation between magnetic north and true north.
If the calibration starts while the audio system is in
use, the display returns to normal after the calibration
is completed.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 244 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
245
Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.
Before Driving
Driving Preparation .......................... 246
Maximum Load Limit........................ 249
Towing a Trailer
Towing Preparation.......................... 251
Driving Safely with a Trailer .............. 254
Towing Your Vehicle........................ 255
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
General Information......................... 257
Important Safety Precautions............ 257
Avoiding Trouble ............................. 258
When Driving
Starting the Engine .......................... 259
Precautions While Driving................. 261
Automatic Transmission................... 262
Shifting............................................ 263
Cruise Control ................................. 265
VSA
®
(Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC
(Electronic Stability Control), System ...... 268
REAL TIME AWD with Intelligent Control
System™*......................................... 270
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)... 270
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -
Required Federal Explanation ......... 271
Braking
Brake System ................................... 273
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ........... 275
Brake Assist System ......................... 276
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped ................................ 277
Parking ............................................ 277
Multi-View Rear Camera*................ 278
Refueling
Fuel Information .............................. 279
How to Refuel ................................. 280
Fuel Economy.................................... 282
Improving Fuel Economy.................. 282
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories ...................................... 283
Modifications................................... 283
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 245 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
246
Driving
Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.
•Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
uRemove any frost, snow, or ice.
uRemove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
uWhen removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
•Make sure the hood is securely closed.
uIf the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
•Make sure the tires are in good condition.
uCheck air pressure, and check for damage and excessive wear.
2Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 320
•Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
uThere are blind spots from the inside.
■Exterior Checks
1Exterior Checks
NOTICE
When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert key if the water freezes in
the hole.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 246 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 247
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
•Store or secure all items on board properly.
uCarrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2Maximum Load Limit P. 249
•Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
uThey can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
•Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
uAn object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
•If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
uThey may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
•Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate.
2Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 104
•Adjust your seating position properly.
uAdjust the head restraint, too.
2Adjusting the Seats P. 128
2Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 131
•Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.
uAdjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 125
2Adjusting the Mirrors P. 126
■Interior Checks
1Interior Checks
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have
the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 247 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
248
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
•Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
uThey can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
•Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2Fastening a Seat Belt P. 34
•Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
uAlways have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2Indicators P. 70
CR-V-31T0A600.book 248 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
249
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Continued
Driving
Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg).
See Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver's doorjamb.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -
(1) Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
1Maximum Load Limit
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue
load.
2Specifications P. 364
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2Specifications P. 364
3
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
Label Example
CR-V-31T0A600.book 249 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
250
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Driving
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Example1
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)
Example2
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)
CR-V-31T0A600.book 250 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
251
Continued
Driving
Towing a Trailer
Towing Preparation
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.
■Total trailer weight
Maximum allowable weight of the trailer,
cargo, and everything in or on it must not
exceed 1,500 lbs (680 kg). Towing loads in
excess of this can seriously affect vehicle
handling and performance and can damage
the engine and drivetrain.
■Tongue load
The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded
trailer on the hitch should be approximately
10% of the total trailer weight.
•Excessive tongue load reduces front tire
traction and steering control. Too little
tongue load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway.
•To achieve a proper tongue load, start by
loading 60% of the load toward the front
of the trailer and 40% toward the rear.
Readjust the load as needed.
■Towing Load Limits
1Towing Load Limits
Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale.
If a public scale is not available, add the estimated
weight of your cargo load to the weight of your
trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the
tongue load.
Break-in Period
Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle's first 600
miles (1,000 km).
Never exceed the gross weight ratings.
Gross weight information
2Vehicle Specifications P. 364
3
WARNING
Exceeding any load limit or improperly
loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a
crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Check the loading of your vehicle and
trailer carefully before starting to drive.
Total Load
Tongue Load
Tongue Load
CR-V-31T0A600.book 251 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
252
Driving
Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing,
and where you are towing.
■Hitches
The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody.
■Safety chains
Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the
trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
■Trailer brakes
Recommended for any trailer with a total weight of 1,000 lbs (450 kg) or more:
There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are
common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes,
be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to
your vehicle's hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a
potential hazard.
■Additional towing equipment
Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a
trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special
mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way.
■Towing Equipment and Accessories
1Towing Equipment and Accessories
Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and
maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/
territory, and local regulations.
Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other
items are recommended or required for your towing
situation.
The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type
and brand. If a connector is required, it should only
be installed by a qualified technician.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 252 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
253
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
Driving
■Trailer light
Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and
local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the
requirements in the area where you plan to tow.
Your trailer lighting connector is located behind the left side panel in the cargo area.
Each pin’s purpose and wiring color code are shown in the image.
When using a non-Honda trailer lighting harness and converter, get the connector
and pins for your vehicle from a dealer.
Right Turn Signal (Green)
Left Turn Signal (Violet)
Small (Red) Backup Light (Brown)
Brake Light (Pink)
Option (Yellow)
Grand (Black)
CR-V-31T0A600.book 253 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
254
uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer
Driving
Driving Safely with a Trailer
•Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition.
•Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.
2Towing Load Limits P. 251
•Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer.
•Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while
driving.
•Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.
•Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare.
•Drive slower than normal.
•Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
•Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads.
•Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal.
•Allow more time and distance for braking.
•Do not brake or turn suddenly.
•Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn off the
heating and cooling system*/climate control system* and reduce speed. Pull to the
side of the road safely to cool down the engine if necessary.
•Shift to the (d position if the transmission shifts frequently.
■Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer
■Towing Speeds and Gears
■Turning and Braking
■Driving in Hilly Terrain
1Driving Safely with a Trailer
Parking
In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel
chocks at each of the trailer's tires.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 254 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
255
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle
Continued
Driving
Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle can be towed behind a motorhome.
Perform the following procedure before towing your vehicle.
1. Check the transmission fluid level.
uMake sure the fluid level is between the upper and lower marks.
2. Start the engine.
3. Depress the brake pedal. Move the shift lever through all its positions.
4. Shift to (D and hold for five seconds, then to (N. Let the engine run for three
minutes, then turn it off.
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Leave the ignition switch in ACCESSORY (q.
uMake sure the steering wheel does not lock.
7. Turn off all the electric devices. Do not use any accessory power sockets.
uThis can prevent the battery from running down.
■When Your Vehicle is Towed Behind a Motorhome
1Towing Your Vehicle
NOTICE
Failure to follow the recommended instructions
exactly will result in severe automatic transmission
damage. If you cannot shift the transmission or start
the engine, your vehicle must be transported on a
flat-bed truck or trailer.
Do not exceed 65 mph (100 km/h).
To avoid damage to the AWD system, your vehicle
must be towed with all four wheels on the ground.
Consult your towing parts sales or rental agency if
any other items are recommended or required for
your towing situation.
If you tow your vehicle behind a motorhome, the
transmission fluid must be changed every 2 years or
30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichever comes first.
AWD models
1When Your Vehicle is Towed Behind a Motorhome
NOTICE
Severe transmission damage will occur if the vehicle is
shifted from (R to (N and then towed with the drive
wheels on the ground.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 255 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
256
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle
Driving
■Extended towing
If you tow more than 8 hours in one day, you should repeat the “before towing your
vehicle procedure” at least every 8 hours. You also need to perform the following
procedure to prevent the battery from running down.
1. Remove the 7.5 A accessory radio fuse and
7.5 A accessory key lock fuse. These fuses
are located in the interior fuse box.
2Interior Fuse Box P. 358
2. Store the fuse in a safe place so you do not
lose it.
uMake sure to reinstall the fuse before
you start driving your vehicle.
Accessory Radio Fuse
Accessory Key Lock Fuse
CR-V-31T0A600.book 256 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
257
Driving
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
General Information
Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement, however, its higher
ground clearance allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads. It is not
designed for trail-blazing, or other challenging off-road activities.
If you decide to drive on unpaved roads, you will find that it requires somewhat
different driving skills and that your vehicle will handle somewhat differently than it
does on pavement. Pay attention to the precautions and tips in this section, and get
acquainted with your vehicle before leaving the pavement.
Important Safety Precautions
To avoid loss of control or rollover, be sure to follow all precautions and
recommendations:
•Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your cargo load limits.
2Maximum Load Limit P. 249
•Whenever you drive, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.
•Keep your speed low, and never go faster than the conditions allow.
•It’s up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits.
1Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.
2Important Handling Information P. 28
2Precautions While Driving P. 261
3
WARNING
Improperly operating this vehicle on or off
pavement can cause a crash or rollover in
which you and your passengers can be
seriously injured or killed.
•Follow all instructions and guidelines in
this owner’s manual.
•Keep your speed low, and don’t drive
faster than conditions permit.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 257 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
258
uuOff-Highway Driving GuidelinesuAvoiding Trouble
Driving
Avoiding Trouble
•Check Out Your Vehicle before you leave the pavement and make sure that all
scheduled maintenance has been completed. Pay special attention to the
condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures.
•Remember the route you choose presents limits (too steep or bumpy), you have
limits (driving skill and comfort), and your vehicle has limits (traction, stability, and
power). Failing to recognize these limits will likely put you and your passengers in
a hazardous situation.
•Accelerating and Braking should be done slowly and gradually. Trying to start
or stop too fast can cause a loss of traction and you could lose control.
•Avoiding Obstacles and Debris in the road reduces the likelihood of a rollover
or damage to your suspension or other components.
•Driving on Slopes increasing your risk of a rollover, particularly if you attempt to
drive across a slope that is too steep. Going straight or down a slope is usually the
safest. If you can’t clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope, walk it before
you drive it. If there is any doubt whether you can safely pass, don’t try it. Find
another route. If you get stuck when climbing, do not try to turn around. Back
down slowly following the same route you took up the hill.
•Crossing a Stream - Avoid driving through deep water. If you encounter water
in your route (a small stream or large puddle, for example), evaluate it carefully
before going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, flowing slowly, and has firm ground
underneath. If you are not sure of the depth or the ground, turn around and find
another route. Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle. The
water can get into the transmission and differential, diluting the lubricant and
causing an eventual failure. It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings.
•If You Get Stuck, carefully go in the direction that you think will get you
unstuck. Do not spin the tires as this will only make things worse and could
damage the transmission. If you are unable to free yourself, your vehicle will need
to be towed. Front and rear tow hooks are provided for this purpose.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 258 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
259
Continued
Driving
When Driving
Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Check that the shift lever is in (P, then
depress the brake pedal.
uAlthough it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N, it is safer to start it in (P.
3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, heating and
cooling system */climate control system*, and rear
defogger in order to reduce battery drain.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 15
seconds.
•If the engine does not start right away, wait for at
least 10 seconds before trying again.
•If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,
wait at least 10 seconds before repeating step 3
while gently depressing the accelerator pedal.
Release the accelerator pedal once the engine
starts.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is
used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.
2Immobilizer System P. 112
Brake Pedal
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 259 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
260
Driving
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that
the brake system indicator has gone off.
2Parking Brake P. 273
2. Put the shift lever in (D. Select (R when reversing.
3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.
■Hill start assist system
Hill start assist feature helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you
move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Move the shift lever to (D or (d when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill,
then release the brake pedal.
The brakes remain engaged briefly as you release the brake pedal.
■Starting to Drive
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
will not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.
Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is
switched off.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 260 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
261
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
Driving
Precautions While Driving
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
To prevent rollovers or loss of control:
•Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle.
•Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible.
•Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the center of gravity.
•Do not carry heavy cargo on the roof.
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or
cause electrical component failure.
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
■Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
■In Rain
■Other Precautions
1Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.
2Important Handling Information P. 28
2Precautions While Driving P. 261
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE
Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q or
LOCK (0 while driving, the engine will shut down
and all steering and brake power assist functions will
stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the shift lever in (N, as you will lose
engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as to not damage the engine or powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brake pads are
replaced.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 261 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
262
uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission
Driving
Automatic Transmission
The following conditions cause the engine to run at high revolutions, and increase
creeping:
•Immediately after the engine starts.
•When the heating and cooling system*/climate control system* is in use.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress
the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
■Creeping
■Kickdown
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 262 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
263
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Continued
Driving
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
■Shift lever positions
1Shifting
You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 and
remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P.
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
Park
Used when parking or starting the
engine
Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Used when idling
Drive
Used for normal driving (gears change
between 1st and 5th automatically)
Drive (D3)
Press the (d button while the shift lever
is in (D.
Used when:
●Going up or down hills
●Towing a trailer in hilly terrain
Second
Used to increase engine braking
(the transmission is locked in 2nd gear)
First
Used to further increase engine braking
(the transmission is locked in 1st gear)
Release Button
(d Button
CR-V-31T0A600.book 263 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
264
Driving
■Shift Lever Operation
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
Whichever position the shift lever is in when driving,
a blinking (D indicator indicates a transmission
problem.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
Tachometer's red zone
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Depress the brake pedal and
press the shift lever release button to
shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.
Press the shift lever release button
and shift.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 264 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
265
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
Continued
Driving
Cruise Control
Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the
accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a
constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.
1Cruise Control
It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed
when driving uphill or downhill.
When not using cruise control:
Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE
button.
While in the ECON mode, it may take relatively more
time to accelerate to maintain the set speed.
3
WARNING
Improper use of the cruise control can lead
to a crash.
Use the cruise control only when traveling
on open highways in good weather.
■Shift positions for cruise control:
In (D or (d
When to use
Always keep sufficient distance
between you and the vehicle in
front of you.
■Vehicle speed for cruise control:
Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
How to use CRUISE MAIN is on in the
instrument panel.
Cruise control is ready to use.
■Press the CRUISE button on
the steering wheel.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 265 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
266
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
Driving
Take your foot off the pedal and press the button when you reach the
desired speed.
The moment you release the button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
■To Set the Vehicle Speed
Button
–/SET
On when cruise control begins Press and release
On
On
–/SET
–/SET
CR-V-31T0A600.book 266 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
267
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
Driving
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the or buttons on the
steering wheel.
•Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
•If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you
release it. This speed is then set.
To cancel cruise control, do any of the
following:
•Press the CANCEL button.
•Press the CRUISE button.
•Depress the brake pedal.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
■To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
You can set the vehicle speed using the button
on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with
the accelerator and brake pedals.
–/SET
RES/+
–/SET
■To Cancel
To decrease speed
To increase speed
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the
button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40
km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
•When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
•When the CRUISE button is turned off
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.
RES/+
CRUISE
Button
CANCEL
Button
CR-V-31T0A600.book 267 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
268
uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System
Driving
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic
Stability Control), System
VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less
than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces.
It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
engine does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink.
■VSA® Operation
1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), System
The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on
while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.
VSA® System
Indicator
CR-V-31T0A600.book 268 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
269
uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System
Driving
This button is on the driver side control panel.
To turn the VSA® system on and off, press and
hold it until you hear a beep.
VSA® will stop and the indicator will come on.
To turn it on again, press the (VSA® OFF)
button until you hear a beep.
VSA® is turned on every time you start the
engine, even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.
■VSA® On and Off
1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), System
Without VSA®, your vehicle will have normal braking
and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA®
traction and stability enhancement.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.
When the VSA® system is off, the traction control
system is also off. You should only attempt to free
your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to
free it when the VSA® is on.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA® and traction control
systems switched off.
If the low tire pressure, or TPMS indicator comes on
or blinks, the VSA® system comes on automatically. In
this case, you cannot turn the system off by pressing
the button.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
VSA® OFF
Indicator
CR-V-31T0A600.book 269 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
270
uuWhen DrivinguREAL TIME AWD with Intelligent Control System™*
Driving
REAL TIME AWD with Intelligent Control System™*
Your vehicle is equipped with the AWD system. When the system senses a loss of
front wheel traction, it automatically transfers some power to the rear wheels. This
allows you to utilize all available traction and may increase mobility.
You still need to exercise the same care when accelerating, steering, and braking
that you would in a two wheel drive vehicle.
If you excessively spin all four wheels and overheat the AWD system, only the front
wheels receive power. Stop until the system cools down.
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Monitors the tire pressure while you are
driving. If your vehicle's tire pressure becomes
significantly low, the low tire pressure
indicator comes on.
1REAL TIME AWD with Intelligent Control System™*
NOTICE
Do not continuously spin the front tires of your
vehicle. Continuously spinning the front tires can
cause transmission or rear differential damage.
The AWD system may not function properly if tire
type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same
size and type of tire, and the air pressures as
specified.
2Tire and Wheel Replacement P. 326
1TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure indicator to come on.
2If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes
On P. 356
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
•Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
•Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure indicator will not come on as a
result of over inflation.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 270 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
271
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Continued
Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability.
U.S. models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 271 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
272
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Driving
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is provided by a separate telltale,
which displays the symbol “TPMS” when illuminated.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 272 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
273
Continued
Driving
Braking
Brake System
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking.
To apply:
Depress the parking brake pedal down with
your foot.
To release:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Depress the parking brake.
■Parking Brake
1Parking Brake
NOTICE
Release the parking brake fully before driving. The
rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive
with the parking brake applied.
If you start driving without fully releasing the parking
brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning.
Always apply the parking brake when parking.
To prevent the parking brake from freezing when the
outside temperature is extremely cold, do not apply
it, but do the following:
Put the shift lever in (P, then use a block or other
wheel chock to stop the wheels from turning.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 273 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBrakinguBrake System
274
Driving
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A power assist helps
reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases the
stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very
hard.
2Brake Assist System P. 276
2ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 275
■Foot Brake
1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, the brake pads need to be
replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 274 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
275
uuBrakinguABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Driving
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
"stomp and steer."
■ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately
if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
■ABS
1ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
NOTICE
The ABS may not function correctly if you use an
incorrect tire type and size.
When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,
there may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking is not affected, there is a
possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes
to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control
during hard braking.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:
•When driving on rough road surfaces, including
when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow.
•When tire chains are installed.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 275 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
276
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System
Driving
Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.
■Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 276 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
277
Driving
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Always use the parking brake when you park your vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is set firmly, or your vehicle may roll if parked on an
incline.
Parking
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly with the shift lever in (D.
2. Apply the parking brake while holding the brake pedal down.
3. Move the shift lever to (P.
4. Turn off the engine.
1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
1When Stopped
NOTICE
The following can damage the transmission:
•Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
•Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
•Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
1Parking
Raise the wiper arms when snow is expected.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 277 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
278
Driving
Multi-View Rear Camera*
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
For models with the navigation system, see the Navigation System Manual.
The multi-information display can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display
automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R.
You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display. Press the
selector knob to switch the angle.
If the last used viewing mode is Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the next
time you shift into (R. If Top view was last used, Wide mode is selected.
■Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt, moist, etc, use
a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of
debris.
Models with navigation system
Models without navigation system
Guidelines
Bumper
Camera
Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)
Tailgate Open Range
Approx. 39 inches (1 m)
Approx. 79 inches (2 m)
Approx. 118 inches (3 m)
Wide View Mode
Normal View Mode
Top Down View Mode
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 278 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
279
Continued
Driving
Refueling
Fuel Information
■Fuel recommendation
Use of lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise
that can lead to engine damage.
■Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
"TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline" standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top
tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
1Fuel Information
NOTICE
We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 279 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
280
Driving
■Gasoline containing ethanol
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is
designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol by
volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.
■Fuel tank capacity: 15.3 US gal (58 liters)
How to Refuel
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Pull on the fuel fill door release handle
under the lower left corner of the
dashboard.
uThe fuel fill door opens.
1How to Refuel
3
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
•Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
•Handle fuel only outdoors.
•Wipe up spills immediately.
Pull
CR-V-31T0A600.book 280 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
281
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
Driving
4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a
release of air, wait until this stops, then turn
the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.
5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder.
6. Insert the filler nozzle fully.
uWhen the tank is full, the fuel nozzle will
click off automatically. This leaves space
in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands
with a change in the temperature.
7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap,
tightening it until you hear it click at least
once.
uShut the fuel fill door by hand.
1How to Refuel
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.
If the fuel nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.
Cap
Cap
Holder
CR-V-31T0A600.book 281 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
282
Driving
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy
Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your
driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and
other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
information display/multi-information display*.
•Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
•Maintain the specified tire pressure.
•Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
•Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
■Maintenance and Fuel Economy
1Improving Fuel Economy
Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
information on how this test is performed, please visit
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/
Miles driven Gallons of
fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100 Liter Kilometers L per 100 km
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 282 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
283
Driving
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
•Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
•Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the side windows.
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the
side curtain airbags.
•Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
2Fuses P. 357
•Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Honda components that can affect its
handling, stability, and reliability.
Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is
properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province,
territory, and local regulations.
1Accessories and Modifications
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
3
WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 283 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
284
CR-V-31T0A600.book 284 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
285
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 286
Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 287
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance
Service ........................................... 288
Maintenance Minder™ .................... 289
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 297
Opening the Hood ........................... 298
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 299
Oil Check......................................... 300
Adding Engine Oil............................ 301
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 302
Engine Coolant................................ 304
Transmission Fluid............................ 306
Brake Fluid....................................... 307
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 308
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 309
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
.... 316
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 320
Tire and Loading Information Label...... 321
Tire Labeling .................................... 321
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......323
Wear Indicators................................ 325
Tire Service Life ................................ 325
Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 326
Tire Rotation.................................... 327
Winter Tires ..................................... 328
Battery............................................... 329
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery ........... 330
Remote Control and Wireless
Headphone Care*........................... 331
Heating and Cooling System*/Climate
Control System* Maintenance....... 333
Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 334
Exterior Care.................................... 336
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 285 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
286
Maintenance
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.) Refer to the separate maintenance booklet for detailed maintenance and
inspection information.
■Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when
refueling.
■Periodic inspections
•Check the automatic transmission fluid level monthly.
2Automatic Transmission Fluid P. 306
•Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2Checking the Brake Fluid P. 307
•Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 320
•Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
2Replacing Light Bulbs P. 309
•Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 316
■Types of Inspection and Maintenance
1Inspection and Maintenance
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are "certified" to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the information display/multi-
information display*.
2Maintenance Service Items P. 291, 295
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
subscription to the Service Express website at
www.techinfo.honda.com.
2Authorized Manuals P. 373
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.
U.S. models
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 286 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
287
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.
However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform
a given task.
•To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
•To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
•Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or
compressed air.
•Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
uOnly operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
•The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
uMake sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
•Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
uMake sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
•Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
uDo not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.
■Maintenance Safety
■Vehicle Safety
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
3
WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner's manual.
3
WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner's manual.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 287 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
288
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Maintenance
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the
same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 288 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
289
Continued
Maintenance
Maintenance Minder™
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the information display or the multi-information display* every time you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w. The messages notify you when to change the
engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance
services.
To Use Maintenance MinderTM
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
2. Press the (SEL/RESET) knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life appears on the
information display.
The Maintenance Minder indicator ( ) stays
on in the instrument panel after the engine oil
life becomes 0%. Have the indicated
maintenance done by a dealer immediately.
■Displaying the Engine Oil Life
Models without multi-information display
1Displaying the Engine Oil Life
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 100 to 91
90 90 to 81
80 80 to 71
70 70 to 61
60 60 to 51
50 50 to 41
40 40 to 31
30 30 to 21
20 20 to 16
15 15 to 11
10 10 to 6
55 to 1
00
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 289 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
290
uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance
To switch the display, press the (SEL/RESET) knob.
■Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display
Oil Life Display Explanation Information Maintenance Minder Indicator
The engine oil life indicator starts
to appear along with other due
soon maintenance item codes
when the remaining oil life
becomes 15 percent.
The engine oil is approaching the
end of its service life.
Starts to come on when the
remaining engine oil life becomes
15 percent.
It goes off when the display is
switched.
The SERVICE message also starts to
appear along with the engine oil
life indicator and the maintenance
item codes.
The engine oil has almost reached
the end of its service life, and the
maintenance items should be
inspected and serviced as soon as
possible.
The remaining engine oil life has
passed its service life, and a
negative distance appears after
driving over 10 miles (U.S. models)
or 10 km (Canadian models). The
negative distance on the display
blinks.
The engine oil life has passed.
The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced
immediately. Stays on as a reminder even when
the display is switched.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 290 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
291
uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Continued
Maintenance
■Maintenance Service Items
1Maintenance Service Items
•Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
•Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).
•Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
Maintenance Minder Message
Maintenance
Minder Indicator
Sub Items
Main Item
*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
CODE Maintenance Main Items
A●Replace engine oil*1
B●Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
●Inspect front and rear brakes
●Check parking brake adjustment
●Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
●Inspect suspension components
●Inspect driveshaft boots
●Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)
●Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
●Inspect exhaust system#
●Inspect fuel lines and connections#*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: If you tow your vehicle behind a motorhome, the transmission fluid must be changed every 2 years or
30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichever comes first.
CODE Maintenance Sub Items
1●Rotate tires
2●Replace air cleaner element*2
●Replace dust and pollen filter*3
●Inspect drive belt
3●Replace transmission fluid*4
4●Replace spark plugs
●Inspect valve clearance
5●Replace engine coolant
6●Replace rear differential fluid*
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 291 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
292
Maintenance
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly
pressing the (SEL/RESET) knob.
3. Press and hold the knob for ten seconds
or more.
uThe engine oil life indicator and the
maintenance item codes blink.
4. Press the knob for five seconds or more.
uThe displayed maintenance items
disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.
■Resetting the Display
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE
Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance
service results in the system showing incorrect
maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious
mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after
completing the required maintenance service. If
someone other than a dealer performs maintenance
service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 292 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
293
uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Continued
Maintenance
To Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the
engine oil, appear on the multi-information display.
You can view them on the Maintenance info screen at any time.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
2. Press the MENU button to go to the Vehicle Menu screen.
3. Select Vehicle Information with the (+ button, then press the SOURCE button.
4. Press the SOURCE button again to go to the Maintenance info screen. The
engine oil life appears on the multi-information display.
■Displaying the Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items
Models with multi-information display
1Displaying the Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you
can view on the multi-information display.
2Maintenance Service Items P. 295
Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 100 to 91
90 90 to 81
80 80 to 71
70 70 to 61
60 60 to 51
50 50 to 41
40 40 to 31
30 30 to 21
20 20 to 16
15 15 to 11
10 10 to 6
55 to 1
00
MENU
SOURCE
50
2345
SOURCE
Button
MENU
Button
Sub Item
Engine Oil Life
Main
Item
CR-V-31T0A600.book 293 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
294
uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance
■Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-Information
Display
Oil Life Display on the
Information Display
Oil Life Display Explanation Information Maintenance Minder
Indicator
15 % The engine oil life indicator
starts to appear along with
other due soon
maintenance item codes
when the remaining oil life
becomes 15 percent.
The engine oil is
approaching the end of
its service life.
Starts to come on when
the remaining engine oil
life becomes 15 percent.
It goes off when the
display is switched.
5 % The SERVICE message also
starts to appear along with
the engine oil life indicator
and the maintenance item
codes.
The engine oil has almost
reached the end of its
service life, and the
maintenance items
should be inspected and
serviced as soon as
possible.
-
The remaining engine oil
life has passed its service
life, and a negative distance
appears after driving over
10 miles (U.S. models) or 10
km (Canadian models). The
negative distance on the
display blinks.
The engine oil life has
passed. The
maintenance items must
be inspected and
serviced immediately. Stays on as a reminder
even when the display is
switched.
15
Engine oil
Air filters
2345
5
Engine oil
Air filters
2345
CR-V-31T0A600.book 294 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
295
uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Continued
Maintenance
■Maintenance Service Items
1Maintenance Service Items
•Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
•Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).
•Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
Maintenance Minder
Message
System Message
Indicator
Sub Items
Main
Item
*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
CODE Maintenance Main Items
A●Replace engine oil*1
B●Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
●Inspect front and rear brakes
●Check parking brake adjustment
●Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
●Inspect suspension components
●Inspect driveshaft boots
●Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)
●Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
●Inspect exhaust system#
●Inspect fuel lines and connections#*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: If you tow your vehicle behind a motorhome, the transmission fluid must be changed every 2 years or
30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichever comes first.
CODE Maintenance Sub Items
1●Rotate tires
2●Replace air cleaner element*2
●Replace dust and pollen filter*3
●Inspect drive belt
3●Replace transmission fluid*4
4●Replace spark plugs
●Inspect valve clearance
5●Replace engine coolant
6●Replace rear differential fluid*
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 295 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
296
Maintenance
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
2. Go to the Maintenance info screen.
2Displaying the Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items P. 293
3. Press the SOURCE button.
uThe oil life reset mode is displayed on the multi-information display.
4. Select Yes with the (- button, then press the SOURCE button.
uThe displayed maintenance items disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.
uAny maintenance items that are necessary for your vehicle at the next
maintenance service will appear.
To cancel the oil life reset mode, select No, then press the SOURCE button.
■Resetting the Display
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE
Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance
service results in the system showing incorrect
maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious
mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after
completing the required maintenance service. If
someone other than a dealer performs maintenance
service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
Engine
Oil Life
SOURCE
Button
(- Button
Maintenance Item Codes
CR-V-31T0A600.book 296 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
297
Maintenance
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)
Engine Coolant
Reservoir
Radiator Cap
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange Handle)
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Dipstick (Yellow Loop)
Battery
CR-V-31T0A600.book 297 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
298
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
Maintenance
Opening the Hood
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
uThe hood will pop up slightly.
3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center
of the hood to release the lock mechanism,
and open the hood.
4. Remove the support rod from the clamp
using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and
stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
hood close.
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE
Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage
either the hood or the wipers.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
Hood Release Handle
Pull
Lever
Support Rod Grip
Clamp
CR-V-31T0A600.book 298 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
299
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
Maintenance
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your engine's
performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,
the engine may fail or be damaged.
This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving
and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Use a Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another
commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for
the ambient temperature as shown.
■Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.
•Genuine Honda Motor Oil
•Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.
Ambient Temperature
CR-V-31T0A600.book 299 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
300
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
Maintenance
Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the
oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange handle).
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil being careful not to overfill.
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
CR-V-31T0A600.book 300 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
301
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
Maintenance
Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
1Adding Engine Oil
If any oil spills, wipe it up immediately. Spilled oil may
damage the engine compartment components.
NOTICE
Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and
engine damage.
Engine Oil
Fill Cap
CR-V-31T0A600.book 301 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
302
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Maintenance
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the
information display/multi-information display*.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.
3. Remove the bolts on the undercarriage
and remove the under cover.
4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE
You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.
Under Cover
Bolt
Drain Bolt
Washer
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 302 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
303
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Maintenance
5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
uIf it is stuck, you must detach it.
7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
uApply a light coat of new engine oil to
the oil filter rubber seal.
8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
uTightening torque:
30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the
engine.
uEngine oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.2 US qt (4.0 L)
10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,
and then check the oil level on the
dipstick.
uIf necessary, add more engine oil.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
your work.
Oil Filter
CR-V-31T0A600.book 303 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
304
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Maintenance
Engine Coolant
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.
2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark,
add the specified coolant until it reaches
the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
■Reserve Tank
1Engine Coolant
NOTICE
You will need a more concentrated coolant if you are
driving in extremely cold temperature below −31°F
(−35°C). Consult your Honda dealer for details about
a suitable coolant mixture.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle's coolant system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.
Reserve
Tank
MAX
MIN
CR-V-31T0A600.book 304 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
305
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Maintenance
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise and
relieve any pressure in the coolant system.
Do not push the cap down when turning.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it
reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
■Radiator
1Radiator
NOTICE
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
Radiator Cap
CR-V-31T0A600.book 305 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
306
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Maintenance
Transmission Fluid
Check the fluid level when the engine is at normal operating temperature.
1. Park on level ground, and start the engine.
2. Wait until the radiator fan starts and then
turn off the engine.
uPerform step 3 after waiting for about 60
seconds (less than 90 seconds).
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the
transmission and wipe it with a clean cloth.
4. Insert the dipstick all the way back into the
transmission securely, as shown in the
image.
5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid
level.
uIt should be between the upper and
lower marks in the HOT range.
6. If the level is below the lower mark, add
fluid into the dipstick hole to bring it to the
level between the upper and lower marks,
and have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
■Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)
1Automatic Transmission Fluid
NOTICE
Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other
transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF
DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and
durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage
the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered
by Honda's new vehicle warranty.
NOTICE
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
HOT
Range
CR-V-31T0A600.book 306 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
307
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid
Maintenance
Brake Fluid
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
■Checking the Brake Fluid
1Brake Fluid
NOTICE
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect for leaks or worn brake pads as
soon as possible.
Brake Reservoir
MIN
MAX
CR-V-31T0A600.book 307 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
308
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
Maintenance
Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Check the amount of window washer fluid using the washer fluid level gauge on the
cap.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
If the washer fluid is low, the indicator appears on the instrument panel.
Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.
Level Gauge
Models with washer level sensor
CR-V-31T0A600.book 308 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
309
Continued
Maintenance
Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the coupler.
2. Remove the rubber weather seal.
3. Remove the hold-down wire, then remove
the bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.
High/Low beam headlight: 60/55W (H4/HB2)
■High/Low Beam Headlight
1Headlight Bulbs
NOTICE
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.
Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause
the bulb to overheat and shatter.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have
the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.
The H4/HB2 type is halogen bulb.
When replacing a bulb, handle it by its base, and
protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
The exterior lights' inside lenses (headlights, brake
lamps, etc.) may fog temporarily after a vehicle wash
or while driving in the rain. This does not impact the
exterior light function.
However, if you see a large amount of water or ice
accumulated inside the lenses, have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
Coupler
Rubber Weather
Seal
Bulb
Hold-down Wire
CR-V-31T0A600.book 309 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs*
310
Maintenance
5. Reinstall the hold-down wire. Hook the end
of the wire on the knob in the slot.
uYou can see if the hold-down wire is in
the right place from the inspection
window.
6. Reinstall the rubber weather seal.
7. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Fog Light Bulbs*
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the clip using a flat-tip screwdriver,
and push up the under cover.
Inspection Window
Hold-down
Wire
Fog Light: 55 W (H11)
1Fog Light Bulbs*
NOTICE
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration,
or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
The fog lights are halogen bulbs.
When replacing a bulb, handle it by its plastic case,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
Clip
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 310 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
311
uuReplacing Light BulbsuSide Marker Light Bulb
Maintenance
2. Remove the coupler.
uIt can be removed by pushing the tab.
3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
4. Insert new bulb.
Side Marker Light Bulb
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Turn the socket to the left and remove it,
then remove the old bulb.
2. Insert a new bulb.
Bulb
Coupler Tab
Side Marker Light: 3 CP
1Fog Light Bulbs*
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the
central pin to remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the central pin raised, and push
until it is flat.
Central pin
Push until the
pin is flat.
Bulb Socket
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 311 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
312
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
2. Push in the old bulb, rotate to the left until
it unlocks, and remove.
3. Insert new bulb.
Brake Light, Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn
Signal Light and Lower Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Use a Phillip-head screwdriver to remove
the bolts.
2. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.
Front Turn Signal/Parking: 24/2.2CP
Bulb Socket
Lower Rear Side Marker/Brake/Taillight: 21/5 W
Back-Up Light: 21 W
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)
Bolts
CR-V-31T0A600.book 312 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
313
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Light, Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Lower Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
Maintenance
3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
Remove the old bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the light assembly by sliding it on
to the guide on the body.
Bulb Socket
Guide
CR-V-31T0A600.book 313 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
314
uuReplacing Light BulbsuUpper Rear Side Marker/Taillight
Maintenance
Upper Rear Side Marker/Taillight
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the lower taillight assembly.
2Brake Light, Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Lower Rear
Side Marker Light Bulbs P. 312
2. Use a Phillip-head screwdriver to remove
the bolt.
3. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.
4. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
Remove the old bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb.
Upper Rear Side Marker/Taillight: 3CP
Bolt
Bulb
Socket
CR-V-31T0A600.book 314 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
315
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulb
Maintenance
Rear License Plate Light Bulb
When replacing, use the following bulb.
1. Push the left edge of the lens to the right
and pull out the licence light assembly.
2. Push the tabs to remove the lens.
3. Remove the old bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.
High-Mount Brake Light Bulb
High-mount brake light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light bulbs.
Rear License Plate Light: 3 CP
Bulb
Tab
Tab
Lens
CR-V-31T0A600.book 315 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
316
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the metal wiper
arm may scratch the window glass.
Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the
passenger side.
2. Push the lock tab up.
3. Slide the blade from the wiper arm.
1Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
windshield.
Lock Tab
CR-V-31T0A600.book 316 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
317
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
Maintenance
4. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by
pulling the tabbed end out.
5. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade
that has been removed, and mount to a
new rubber blade.
uCorrectly align the rubber protrusion and
the retainer grooves.
6. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder
from the bottom end.
uThe tab on the holder should fit in the
indent of the wiper blade.
7. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm,
then push down the lock tab.
8. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.
Blade
Top Retainer
Blade
Tab
Indent
CR-V-31T0A600.book 317 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
318
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
Maintenance
Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Raise the wiper arm off.
2. Pull up the lock tab and release the wiper
arm.
3. Slide the wiper blade out from the end with
the indent.
1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
windshield.
Lock Tab
Blade
CR-V-31T0A600.book 318 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
319
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
Maintenance
4. Remove the retainers from wiper blade and
mount to a new rubber blade.
5. Slide the wiper blade onto the holder.
uMake sure it is engaged correctly, then
install the wiper blade assembly onto the
wiper arm.
Retainer
Rubber
CR-V-31T0A600.book 319 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
320
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
■Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.
Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in
all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.
■Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
•Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
•Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
•Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
•Excessive tread wear.
2Wear Indicators P. 325
•Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
1Checking Tires
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if
checked when cold.
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.
3
WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 320 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
321
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Continued
Maintenance
Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described below.
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
aThe number of people your vehicle can carry.
bThe total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
cThe original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare.
dThe proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.
Label
Example
Example Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)
Maximum
Tire Load
Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size
■Tire Sizes
1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
215/70R16 100S
215: Tire width in millimeters.
70: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
16: Rim diameter in inches.
100: Load index (a numerical code associated with
the maximum load the tire can carry).
S: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).
CR-V-31T0A600.book 321 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling
322
Maintenance
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
■Tire Identification Number (TIN)
■Glossary of Tire Terminology
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
CR-V-31T0A600.book 322 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
323
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Continued
Maintenance
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
■Uniform Tire Quality Grading
■Treadwear
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 323 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
324
Maintenance
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
■Traction
■Temperature
1Traction
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
1Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 324 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
325
uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uWear Indicators
Maintenance
Wear Indicators
The groove where the wear indicator is
located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than
elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet
roads.
Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10
years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark
CR-V-31T0A600.book 325 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
326
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
Maintenance
Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause the ABS, VSA® (vehicle stability assist), hill
start assist, and the AWD* system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
If you replace a wheel, only use TPMS specified wheels approved for your vehicle.
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3
WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 326 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
327
uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uTire Rotation
Maintenance
Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the information display/
multi-information display* helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
■Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
■Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
FRONT
Direction Mark
Front
Front
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 327 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
328
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
Maintenance
Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked ”M+S” tires, snow
tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles
when driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires:
•Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
•Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:
•Install them on the front tires only.
•Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
•Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
•Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
•Drive slowly.
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1042
1Winter Tires
NOTICE
Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.
3
WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 328 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
329
Maintenance
Battery
Checking the Battery
Check the battery condition monthly. Look at
the test indicator window and check the
terminals for corrosion.
If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead:
•The audio system is disabled.
2Reactivating the audio system P. 158
•The clock resets.
2Setting the Clock P. 98
•The navigation system* is disabled.
2Refer to the navigation system manual
Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.
1Battery
WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
The test indicator's color information is on the
battery.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Rinse the terminals with water. Cloth/towel dry the
battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help
prevent future corrosion.
3
WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery
maintenance, wear protective clothing and
a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
it.
Test Indicator Window
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 329 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
330
Maintenance
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.
1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillips-
head screwdriver. Press a button to pry
open the transmitter.
2. Open the keypad.
uWrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a
cloth to prevent scratching the
transmitter.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
1Replacing the Button Battery
NOTICE
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.
Keypad
Screw
Battery type: CR1616
Battery
CR-V-31T0A600.book 330 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
331
Continued
Maintenance
Remote Control and Wireless Headphone Care*
Replacing the Battery
If it takes several pushes on the remote control buttons to operate the rear
entertainment system*.
1. Remove the cover.
2. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
■Remote Control
Models with Rear Entertainment System
1Replacing the Battery
NOTICE
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.
Battery type: CR2025
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 331 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
332
uuRemote Control and Wireless Headphone Care*uReplacing the Battery
Maintenance
If there is no sound coming from the wireless headphone, replace the battery.
1. To open the cover, insert a coin in the slot
and twist it slightly to pry the cover away
from the earpiece.
2. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
■Wireless Headphone
Coin
Battery type: AAA
Battery
Cover
CR-V-31T0A600.book 332 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
333
Maintenance
Heating and Cooling System
*
/Climate Control System
*
Maintenance
Dust and Pollen Filter
The heating and cooling system*/climate control system* is equipped with a dust
and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The
Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the heating and cooling system*/
climate control system* deteriorates noticeably, and
the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be
replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 333 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
334
Maintenance
Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
■Cleaning Seat Belts
1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.
Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if
liquids are splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches.
Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire
inside the vehicle.
If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
off using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
Opening
CR-V-31T0A600.book 334 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
335
uuCleaninguInterior Care
Maintenance
The driver’s floor mat hooks over the floor
anchors, which keep the mat from sliding
forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn
the anchor knobs to the unlock position.
When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn
the knobs to the lock position.
Do not put additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mat.
Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats
and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and
10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or
dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
■Floor Mats
1Floor Mats
If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are
not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.
Lock
Unlock
■Maintaining Genuine Leather*
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 335 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
336
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
•If driving on roads with road salt.
•If driving in coastal areas.
•If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
•Remove the audio antenna.
2Audio Antenna P. 158
•Fold in the door mirrors.
Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated vehicle wash.
•Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
•Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray water into the engine compartment.
■Washing the Vehicle
■Using an Automated Vehicle Wash
■Using High Pressure Cleaners
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents or engine
compartment. It can cause a malfunction.
Air Intake Vents
CR-V-31T0A600.book 336 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
337
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly.
Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or
a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that
helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.
■Applying Wax
■Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
■Cleaning the Window
■Maintaining Aluminum Wheels*
1Applying Wax
NOTICE
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe up
spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.
1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 337 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
338
CR-V-31T0A600.book 338 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
339
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
Tools
Types of Tools .................................. 340
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire......................... 341
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine........................ 347
Jump Starting.................................... 348
Shift Lever Does Not Move.............. 350
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 351
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes
On ............................................. 353
If the Charging System Indicator Comes
On ................................................. 353
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
On or Blinks ................................... 354
If the Brake System Indicator Comes On.......355
If the EPS Indicator Comes On.......... 355
If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes
On ................................................. 356
If the TPMS Indicator Comes On ...... 356
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 357
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 359
Emergency Towing........................... 360
When You Cannot Open the Tailgate
..... 361
CR-V-31T0A600.book 339 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
341
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact
spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full size tire repaired or
replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery ground.
2. Put the shift lever in (P.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0.
1Changing a Flat Tire
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
a full size tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model.
Do not use them with another vehicle.
Do not use another type of compact spare tire or
wheel with your vehicle.
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the full size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
Do not use a puncture-repairing agent on a flat tire,
as it can damage the tire pressure sensor.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 341 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
342
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
1. Open the cargo area floor lid.
2. Take the tool bag out of the cargo area.
Take the wheel nut wrench and jack handle
bar out of the tool bag.
3. Take the jack out of the spare tire area.
4. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the
spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.
■Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
Tool Bag
Spare Tire
CR-V-31T0A600.book 342 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
343
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
5. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear
of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
6. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up)
under the vehicle body, near the tire that
needs to be replaced.
7. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.
Wheel
Blocks
The tire to be replaced.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 343 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
344
Handling the Unexpected
1. Place the jack under the jacking point
closest to the tire to be changed.
2. Turn the end bracket (as shown in the
image) clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point.
uMake sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
ground.
■How to Set Up the Jack
1How to Set Up the Jack
Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
Other jacks may not support the weight ("load") or
their shape may not match.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely.
•Do not use while the engine is running.
•Use only where the ground is firm and level.
•Use only at the jacking points.
•Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
•Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
3
WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire
exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.
Jack
Handle
Bar Wheel Nut
Wrench as Jack Handle
CR-V-31T0A600.book 344 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Continued 345
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, and stop
rotating.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)
■Replacing the Flat Tire
1Replacing the Flat Tire
Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
torque using your foot or a pipe.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 345 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
346
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the center cap.
2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire
well.
3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing
bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the
bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
4. Securely store the wheel nut wrench and
jack handle bar back in the tool bag. Store
the bag in the cargo area.
5. Store the jack in its holder. Turn the jack’s
end bracket to lock it in place.
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure indicator comes on
while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the indicator will go
off and the TPMS indicator comes on, but this is normal.
If you replace the tire with a specified regular tire, the low tire pressure or TPMS
indicator will go off after a few miles (kilometers).
■Storing the Flat Tire
1Storing the Flat Tire
3
WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
before driving.
Spacer
Cone
Wing
Bolt
For compact spare tire
For
normal
tire
■TPMS and the Spare Tire
1TPMS and the Spare Tire
The system cannot monitor the pressure of the spare
tire. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure
that it is correct.
Use TPMS specific wheels. Each is equipped with a
tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind
the valve stem.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 346 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
347
Handling the Unexpected
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, turn the ignition switch to START (e and check the
starter.
Starter condition Checklist
Starter doesn’t turn or turns
over slowly.
The battery may be dead. Check
each of the items on the right and
respond accordingly.
Check brightness of the interior light.
Turn on interior lights and check brightness.
●If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all
2Battery P. 329
●If the interior lights come on normally 2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 359
The starter turns over normally
but the engine doesn’t start.
There may be a problem with the
fuse. Check each of the items on
the right and respond accordingly.
Review the engine start procedure.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 259
Check the immobilizer system indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
2Immobilizer System P. 112
Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel Gauge P. 79
Check the fuse.
Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 359
If the problem continues:
2Emergency Towing P. 360
1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2Jump Starting P. 348
CR-V-31T0A600.book 347 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
348
Handling the Unexpected
Jump Starting
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,
then open the hood.
1. Connect the first jumper cable to your
vehicle's + terminal.
2. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the assisting vehicle's + terminal.
uUse a 12-volt booster battery only.
3. Connect the second jumper cable to the
assisting vehicle's - terminal.
4. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt
as shown.
Do not connect this jumper cable to any
other part.
5. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
6. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
■Jump Starting Procedure
1Jump Starting
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they
do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
may prevent the engine from starting.
3
WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow
the correct procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the battery.
Booster Battery
CR-V-31T0A600.book 348 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
349
uuJump Startingu
Handling the Unexpected
Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the assisting vehicle's -
terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the assisting vehicle's +
terminal.
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
■What to Do After the Engine Starts
CR-V-31T0A600.book 349 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
350
Handling the Unexpected
Shift Lever Does Not Move
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flat-
tip screwdriver and remove the cover of the
shift lock release slot.
uPut the tip of the flat-tip screwdriver into
the slot and remove it as shown in the
image.
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
5. While pushing on the key, press the shift
lever release button and place the shift lever
into (N.
uThe lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
■Releasing the Lock
Slot
Cover
Release
Button
Shift Lock Release Slot
CR-V-31T0A600.book 350 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
351
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
•The temperature gauge needle is at the mark or the engine suddenly loses
power.
•Steam is coming out of the engine compartment.
■First thing to do
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
uMove the shift lever to (P and set the parking brake. Turn off all accessories
and turn on the hazard warning lights.
2. No steam coming out: Keep the engine running and open the hood.
Steam coming out: Turn off the engine and wait until steam goes away. Then,
open the hood.
1How to Handle Overheating
NOTICE
Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge
needle at the mark may damage the engine.
3
WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.
H
H
CR-V-31T0A600.book 351 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
352
Handling the Unexpected
■Next thing to do
1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the temperature
gauge needle comes down.
uIf the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
uIf the coolant level in the reserve tank is
low, add coolant until it reaches the
MAX mark.
uIf there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.
■Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge.
If the temperature needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone down,
contact a dealer for repairs.
1How to Handle Overheating
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
Reserve
Tank
MAX
MIN
CR-V-31T0A600.book 352 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
353
Handling the Unexpected
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
■Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
■What to do as soon as the indicator comes on
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
■What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about one minute.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
uAdd oil as necessary.
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator.
uThe light goes out: Start driving again.
uThe light does not go out within 10 seconds: Stop the engine and
contact a dealer for repairs immediately.
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
■Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the battery is not being charged.
■What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the heating and cooling system*/climate control system*, rear
defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer
for repairs.
1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE
Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
the battery.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 353 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
354
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks
■Reasons for indicator lamp to come on or blink
•Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose.
•Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a
dealer.
■What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
ten minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
■The message appears on when:
An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being
loose or not being installed.
■What to do when the message appears:
1. Stop the engine.
2. Check that the fuel fill cap is fully installed.
uIf not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.
3. Drive for several days of normal driving.
uThe message should go off.
■When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
Malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of
gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described
above.
■Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 354 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
355
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator Comes On
Handling the Unexpected
If the Brake System Indicator Comes On
■Reasons for the indicator to come on
•The brake fluid is low.
•There is a malfunction in the brake system.
■What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
•If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
•If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
If the EPS Indicator Comes On
■Reasons for the indicator to come on
•Comes on when there is a problem with EPS.
•If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and
sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
■What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
1If the Brake System Indicator Comes On
Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift
the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come
on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution
system is not working. This can result in vehicle
instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
U.S.
Canada
1If the EPS Indicator Comes On
NOTICE
If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on
the full left or right position for a while, the system
heats up. The system goes into a protective mode,
and limits its performance. The steering wheel
becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the
system cools down, EPS is restored. Repeated
operation under these conditions can eventually
damage the system.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 355 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
356
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes On
Handling the Unexpected
If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes On
■Reasons for the indicator to come on
A tire pressure is significantly low. If the compact spare tire is installed,
the indicator stays on for a while, and then goes off.
■What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
If the TPMS Indicator Comes On
■Reasons for the indicator to come on
•Comes on when there is a problem with the TPMS.
•If the compact spare is installed, the indicator comes on after driving
for a few miles (kilometers).
■What to do when the indicator comes on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire has triggered the indicator to comes on, change the tire to a
full size tire. The indicator goes off after a while.
1If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE
Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 356 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
357
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working,
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 and
check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.
Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push
the tabs to open the box.
■Engine Compartment Fuse Box
■Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1
EPS 70 A
− −
ABS/VSA Motor 40 A
ABS/VSA FSR 20 A
E-DPS*(30 A)
Main Fuse 100 A
2
IG Main 50 A
Fuse Box Main 60 A
Fuse Box Main 2 60 A
Headlight Main 30 A
− −
Rear Defogger 30 A
−−
Blower 40 A
Front Wiper Main 30 A
Sub Fan Motor 20 A
Main Fan Motor 20 A
3 − −
4− −
5 − −
6− −
7 − −
8 Sub Fan Rly CL 7.5 A
9 − −
10 Heated Door Mirror*(7.5 A)
11 STRLD 7.5 A
12 Fog Lights*(20 A)
13 Premium Amp*(20 A)
14 Horn 10 A
15 Hazard 10 A
16 Stop 10 A
17 IG Coil 15 A
18 IGP2 15 A
19 − −
20 − −
21 − −
22 DBW 15 A
23 IGP 15 A
24 Left Headlight Low Beam 10 A
25 Right Headlight Low Beam 10 A
26 SMALL 20 A
27 MG Clutch 7.5 A
28 Interior Lights 7.5 A
29 Backup 10 A
Circuit Protected Amps
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 357 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
358
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected
Located under the dashboard.
Fuse locations are shown on the label on
the cover.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse
number and label number.
■Circuit protected and fuse rating
■Interior Fuse Box
Fuse Label
Fuse Box
Circuit Protected Amps
1 − −
2ACG 10 A
3SRS 10 A
4Fuel Pump 15 A
5Meter 10 A
6Power Window 7.5 A
7VB SOL 7.5 A
8Door Lock Motor 2 (Unlock) 15 A
9Door Lock Motor 1 (Unlock) 10 A
10 Trailer*(7.5 A)
11 Moonroof*(20 A)
12 Accessory Power Socket
(Center Console)*(15 A)
13 − −
14 Seat Heaters*(20 A)
15 Driver’s Door Lock Motor
(Unlock) 10 A
16 Driver's Power Seat Sliding*(20 A)
17 Driver's Power Seat
Reclining*(20 A)
18 − −
19 ACC 7.5 A
20 ACC Key Lock 7.5 A
21 Daytime Running Lights 7.5 A
22 A/C 7.5 A
23 Rear Wiper 10 A
24 ABS/VSA 7.5 A
25 Audio 10 A
26 − −
27 Accessory Power Socket
(Front) 15 A
28 Washer 15 A
29 ODS 7.5 A
30 Driver’s Door Lock Motor
(Lock)*10 A
31 − −
Circuit Protected Amps
32 Door Lock Motor 2 (Lock) 15 A
33 Door Lock Motor 1 (Lock) 15 A
34 Small Lights 10 A
35 Illumination 7.5 A
36 − −
37 − −
38 Left Headlight High Beam 10 A
39 Right Headlight High Beam 10 A
40 TPMS 7.5 A
41 Door Lock 20 A
42 Driver’s Power Window 20 A
43 Rear Passenger’s Side
Power Window 20 A
44 Front Passenger’s Side
Power Window 20 A
45 Rear Driver’s Side Power
Window 20 A
46 − −
Circuit Protected Amps
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 358 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
359
uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Handling the Unexpected
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0. Turn
headlights and all accessories off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment.
uIf the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and
replace it with a new one.
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
uIf there is a burned out fuse, remove it
with the fuse puller and replace it with a
new one.
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE
Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
amperage.
Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on
P. 357 to 358.
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine
compartment fuse box cover.
Combined
Fuse
Blown Fuse
Fuse Puller
CR-V-31T0A600.book 359 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
360
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
■Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.
■Wheel lift equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to
tow your vehicle.
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle's weight.
NOTICE
Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous, since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.
All models
2WD models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 360 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
361
Handling the Unexpected
When You Cannot Open the Tailgate
If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure.
1. Use a flat-tip screwdriver and remove the
cover on the inside of the tailgate.
2. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate
while sliding the lever to the side using a
flat-tip screwdriver.
■What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate
1What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate
What to do-Following up
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the
vehicle checked.
When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure
there is enough space around the tailgate, and it
does not hit anyone or any object.
Cover
Lever
CR-V-31T0A600.book 361 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
362
CR-V-31T0A600.book 362 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
363
Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.
Specifications .................................... 364
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...... 366
Engine Number and Transmission
Number...................................... 366
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 367
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 368
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 369
Warranty Coverages ........................ 371
Authorized Manuals......................... 373
Customer Service Information......... 374
CR-V-31T0A600.book 363 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
364
Information
Specifications
■Vehicle Specifications
*1: LX models with 2WD
*2: LX models with AWD, EX and EX-L models with 2WD
*3: EX, EX-L models with AWD and TOUR models
Model Honda CR-V
No. of Passengers:
Front 2
Rear 3
Total 5
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
U.S.: 4,332 lbs (1,965 kg)*1
4,464 lbs (2,025 kg)*2
4,564 lbs (2,070 kg)*3
Canada: 1,965 kg*1
2,025 kg*2
2,070 kg*3
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
U.S.: 2,227 lbs (1,010 kg)*1
2,271 lbs (1,030 kg)*2
2,326 lbs (1,055 kg)*3
Canada: 1,010 kg*1
1,030 kg*2
1,055 kg*3
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)
U.S.: 2,150 lbs (975 kg)*1
2,238 lbs (1,015 kg)*2
2,282 lbs (1,035 kg)*3
Canada: 975 kg*1
1,015 kg*2
1,035 kg*3
Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Charge Quantity 13.6 – 15.4 oz (385 – 435 g)
Lubricant Type SP-10
■Engine Specifications
■Fuel
■Battery
■Washer Fluid
Displacement 144 cu-in (2,354 cm3)
Spark Plugs NGK ILZKR7B-11S
DENSO SXU22HCR11S
Fuel:
Type
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 15.3 US gal (58 ℓ)
Capacity/Type
36AH(5)/45AH(20)
36AH(5)/47AH(20)
38AH(5)/47AH(20)
Tank Capacity U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)
Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 ℓ)
■Light Bulbs
*1: Not available on all models
Headlights (High/Low Beams) 60/55W (H4/HB2)
Fog Lights 55W (H11)
Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights 24/2.2CP
Side Marker Lights 3CP
Upper Rear Side Marker/Taillights 3CP
Lower Rear Side Marker/Brake/
Taillights 21/5W
Back-Up Lights 21W
Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber)
High-Mount Brake Light LED
Rear License Plate Light 3CP
Cargo Area Light 8W
Vanity Mirror Lights*1 2W
Interior Lights
Map Lights 8W
Ceiling Light 8W
CR-V-31T0A600.book 364 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
365
uuSpecificationsu
Information
■Brake Fluid
■Automatic Transmission Fluid
*1: 2WD models
*2: AWD models
■Rear Differential Fluid*
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified Honda ATF DW-1
(automatic transmission fluid)
Capacity Change 2.3 US qt (2.2 ℓ)*1
2.7 US qt (2.6 ℓ)*2
Specified Honda Dual Pump Fluid II
Capacity Change 1.32 US qt (1.247 ℓ)
Total 1.57 US qt (1.488 ℓ)
■Engine Oil
■Engine Coolant
Recommended ·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Capacity
Change 4.0 US qt (3.8 ℓ)
Change
including
filter
4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.64 US gal (6.2 ℓ)
(change including the remaining
0.16 US gal (0.62 ℓ) in the reserve tank)
■Tire
*1: LX
*2: EX, EX-L, TOUR
Regular
Size 215/70R16 100S*1
225/65R17 102T*2
Pressure
psi(kPa[kgf/cm2])
32 (220 [2.2])*1
31 (210 [2.1])*2
Compact
Spare
Size T155/90D17 101M
T165/80D17 104M
Pressure
psi(kPa[kgf/cm2]) 60 (420 [4.2])
Wheel Size Regular 16 x 6.5J*1
17 x 6.5J*2
Compact Spare 17 x 4T
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book 365 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
366
Information
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. See the
image below for the VIN locations.
Engine Number and Transmission Number
See the image below for the locations of your vehicle's engine number and
transmission number.
1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is
located under the cover.
Cover
Vehicle Identification Number
Engine Number
Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification Number
Automatic Transmission
Number
CR-V-31T0A600.book 366 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
367
Information
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in operation.
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required
standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada
Standard, described below:
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Audio System
Bluetooth® Audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Immobilizer System
Remote Transmitter
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Rear Entertainment System Remote Control
Models with Rear Entertainment System
CR-V-31T0A600.book 367 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
368
Information
Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For
more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 368 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
369
Continued
Information
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle uses "readiness codes," as part of its onboard self diagnostic system.
Some states refer to these codes during testing to see if your vehicle's emissions
components are working properly.
The codes may not be read if you go through the testing just after the battery has
gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w, without starting the
engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are
not set.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in (P. Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there
for about 3 minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only after several days of
driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 369 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
370
uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
Information
7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D. Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without
moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you
cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for
at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 370 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
371
Continued
Information
Warranty Coverages
■U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for
rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this
warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 371 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
372
uuWarranty Coveragesu
Information
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a
replacement battery purchased from a dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the 2012 Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
■Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2012 warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
CR-V-31T0A600.book 372 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
373
Information
Authorized Manuals
■Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
■For U.S. Owners:
The publications listed below can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can
order a manual by phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at
www.helminc.com.
Make an inquiry to Helm Inc. at (800) 782-4356 if you are interested in ordering
other models' or other years' manuals.
Publication
Form Number Form Description
31T0A600 2012 Honda CR-V Owner’s Manual
31T0A800 2012 Honda CR-V Navigation
System Owner’s Manual
31T0AM00 2012 Honda CR-V Service History
31T0AA00 2012 Honda CR-V Technology Reference Guide (LX)
31T0AB00
2012 Honda CR-V Technology Reference Guide (EX/EX-L)
31T0AC00 2012 Honda CR-V Technology Reference Guide
(EX-L/TOUR with Navigation)
HON-R Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
1Authorized Manuals
For Canadian Owners:
Si vous avez besoin d'un Manuel du Conducteur en
français, veuillez demander à votre concessionnaire
de commander le numéro de pièce 33T0AC00
CR-V-31T0A600.book 373 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
374
Information
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals.
They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that
your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the
dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership's management, contact Honda Customer Services.
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Services
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Canadian Owners:
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
•Vehicle Identification Number
2Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
P. 366
•Date of purchase
•Odometer reading of your vehicle
•Your name, address, and telephone number
•A detailed description of the problem
•Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
CR-V-31T0A600.book 374 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Index
375
Index
Index
Numbers
4WD .......................................................... 270
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).................. 275
Accessories and Modifications ................ 283
Accessory Power Sockets ......................... 141
Additives
Coolant .................................................. 304
Engine Oil ............................................... 299
Washer ................................................... 308
Additives, Engine Oil ............................... 299
Adjusting
Armrest .................................................. 137
Front Seats.............................................. 128
Head Restraints....................................... 131
Mirrors.................................................... 126
Rear Seat Back ........................................ 136
Rear Seats............................................... 135
Steering Wheel ....................................... 125
Air Conditioning System (Climate Control
System).................................................... 151
Changing the Mode................................ 151
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows .............................................. 152
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 333
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode................... 151
Sensors ................................................... 154
Synchronized Mode ................................ 153
Using Automatic Climate Control............ 151
Air Conditioning System (Heating and
Cooling System) ...................................... 148
Cooling ................................................... 150
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ............................................... 150
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 333
Heating ................................................... 149
Air Pressure ....................................... 321, 365
Airbags ........................................................ 39
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 45
After a Collision......................................... 43
Airbag Care............................................... 53
Event Data Recorder .................................. 22
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 42
Indicator........................................ 50, 73, 76
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 51
Sensors...................................................... 39
Side Airbag Cutoff System ......................... 48
Side Airbag Off Indicator ........................... 52
Side Airbags .............................................. 46
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 49
AM/FM Radio .................................... 161, 175
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 275
Indicator.................................................... 73
Armrest ..................................................... 137
Audio Antenna ......................................... 158
Audio Remote Controls............................ 209
Audio System ............................................ 156
Adjusting the Sound........................ 160, 174
Auxiliary Input Jack .................................. 157
Error Messages ........................................ 205
General Information ................................ 210
iPod®............................................... 167, 183
MP3/WMA/AAC.............................. 170, 188
Pandora®................................................. 186
Reactivating ............................................ 158
Recommended CDs................................. 211
Recommended Devices............................ 213
Security Code.......................................... 158
Theft Protection ...................................... 158
USB Adapter Cable.................................. 157
USB Flash Drives...................................... 213
Authorized Manuals ................................ 373
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking................. 106
Customize......................................... 91, 107
Automatic Lighting .................................. 119
Automatic Transmission........................... 262
Creeping................................................. 262
Fluid........................................................ 306
Kickdown................................................ 262
Operating the Shift Lever................... 16, 264
Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 350
Shifting ................................................... 263
Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 157
Average Fuel Economy ........................ 81, 84
Average Speed ........................................... 84
AWD.......................................................... 270
CR-V-31T0A600.book 375 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
376
Index
B
Battery....................................................... 329
Charging System Indicator ................. 71, 353
Jump Starting .......................................... 348
Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ........ 329
Maintenance (Replacing).......................... 330
Behind a Motorhome ............................... 255
Belts (Seat) .................................................. 31
Beverage Holders...................................... 140
Bluetooth® Audio ..................................... 191
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..................... 214
Booster Seats (For Children)....................... 66
Brake System............................................. 273
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 275
Brake Assist System ................................. 276
Fluid ........................................................ 307
Foot Brake ............................................... 274
Indicator ............................................ 70, 355
Parking Brake .......................................... 273
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) .... 123
Bulb Replacement..................................... 309
Brake Light, Taillight, Back-Up Light,
Rear Turn Signal Light and Lower Rear
Side Marker Light.................................. 312
Fog Lights................................................ 310
Front Turn Signal/Parking Light ................ 312
Headlights ............................................... 309
High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 315
Rear License Plate Light............................ 315
Side Marker Lights ................................... 311
Upper Rear Side Marker/Taillight.............. 314
Bulb Specifications ................................... 364
C
Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 67
Cargo Hook............................................... 143
Cargo Side Net.......................................... 142
Carrying Cargo ................................. 247, 249
CD Player........................................... 163, 180
Certification Label.................................... 366
Changing Bulbs ........................................ 309
Charging System Indicator................. 71, 353
Child Safety................................................. 54
Childproof Door Locks............................. 105
Child Seat.................................................... 54
Booster Seats ............................................ 66
Child Seat for Infants................................. 56
Child Seat for Small Children..................... 57
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder
Seat Belt.................................................. 62
Larger Children ......................................... 65
Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 56
Selecting a Child Seat................................ 58
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 105
Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 336
Cleaning the Interior................................ 334
Climate Control System............................ 151
Changing the Mode ................................ 151
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows............................................... 152
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 333
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode................... 151
Sensors ................................................... 154
Synchronized Mode ................................ 153
Using Automatic Climate Control............ 151
Clock ........................................................... 98
Coat Hook ................................................ 142
Compact Spare Tire.......................... 341, 365
Compass.................................................... 243
Console Compartment............................. 139
Controls ...................................................... 97
Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 304
Adding to the Radiator ........................... 305
Adding to the Reserve Tank .................... 304
Overheating............................................ 351
Creeping (Automatic Transmission)........ 262
Cruise Control .......................................... 265
Indicator ................................................... 78
Cup Holders.............................................. 140
Customer Service Information ................ 374
Customized Features ................................. 86
D
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 120
Dead Battery ............................................ 348
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows......................................... 150, 152
Detachable Anchor .................................... 36
Devices that Emit Radio Waves............... 367
Dimming
Headlights .............................................. 118
CR-V-31T0A600.book 376 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
377
Index
Rearview Mirror ...................................... 126
Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................ 300
Directional Signals (Turn Signal)............. 118
Display Button............................................ 83
Door Mirrors............................................. 127
Doors ........................................................ 100
Auto Door Locking.................................. 106
Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 106
Door Open Indicator ........................... 30, 74
Keys........................................................ 100
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside .................................................... 104
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside ................................................. 102
Lockout Prevention System ..................... 103
DOT Tire Quality Grading........................ 323
Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support ................. 128
Driving ...................................................... 245
Automatic Transmission .......................... 262
Braking ................................................... 273
Cruise Control ........................................ 265
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines .............. 257
Shifting Gear .......................................... 263
Starting the Engine ................................. 259
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 333
DVD Player ............................................... 193
E
Eco Assist System.......................................... 7
ECON Button ............................................ 125
Elapsed Time............................................... 84
Electric Power Steering System (EPS)
Indicator............................................ 75, 355
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............. 268
Emergency ................................................ 360
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ....... 369
Engine ....................................................... 366
Coolant ................................................... 304
Jump Starting .......................................... 348
Oil ........................................................... 299
Starting ................................................... 259
Switch Buzzer.......................................... 117
Engine Coolant ......................................... 304
Adding to the Radiator ............................ 305
Adding to the Reserve Tank ..................... 304
Overheating ............................................ 351
Temperatue Guage.................................... 79
Engine Oil ................................................. 299
Adding .................................................... 301
Checking................................................. 300
Displaying Oil Life ............................ 289, 293
Low Oil Pressure Indicator.................. 70, 353
Recommended Engine Oil........................ 299
EPS (Electric Power Steering
System) .............................................. 75, 355
Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .. 67
Exterior Care (Cleaning) ........................... 336
Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 127
F
Features .................................................... 155
Filters
Dust and Pollen....................................... 333
Oil........................................................... 302
Flat Tire..................................................... 341
Floor Mats................................................. 335
Fluids
Automatic Transmission .......................... 306
Brake ...................................................... 307
Engine Coolant ....................................... 304
Windshield Washer ................................. 308
Fog Light Indicator..................................... 76
Folding Down the Rear Seats .................. 135
Foot Brake ................................................ 274
Front Airbags (SRS)..................................... 42
Front Seats................................................ 128
Adjusting ................................................ 128
Fuel...................................................... 17, 279
Economy................................................. 282
Gauge....................................................... 79
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 72
Range ................................................. 81, 84
Recommendation .................................... 279
Refueling................................................. 279
Fuel Economy ........................................... 282
Fuel Fill Cap ........................................ 17, 281
Message.................................................. 354
Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 17, 280
CR-V-31T0A600.book 377 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
378
Index
Fuses .......................................................... 357
Inspecting and Changing......................... 359
Locations ......................................... 357, 358
G
Gasoline (Fuel)
Economy ................................................. 282
Gauge ....................................................... 79
Information ............................................. 279
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 72
Refueling................................................. 279
Gauges......................................................... 79
Gear Shift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission........................... 263
Glass (care) ................................................ 337
Glove Box .................................................. 139
H
Halogen Bulbs................................... 309, 310
Handling the Unexpected ........................ 339
HandsFreeLink® (HFL)............................... 214
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook
and Call History ..................................... 230
Automatic Transferring ............................ 228
Caller’s ID Information ............................. 228
HFL Buttons ............................................. 214
HFL Menus .............................................. 216
HFL Status Display.................................... 215
Making a Call .......................................... 233
Options During a Call .............................. 237
Phone Setup............................................ 221
Receiving a Call ....................................... 236
Speed Dial............................................... 231
Text Message .................................. 226, 238
To Clear the System ................................ 229
To Create a Security PIN .......................... 227
Hazard Warning Button .............................. 2
Head Restraints ........................................ 131
Headlights................................................. 118
Aiming .................................................... 309
Automatic Operation............................... 119
Dimming ......................................... 118, 120
Operating................................................ 118
Heaters (Seat) ........................................... 145
Heating and Cooling System ................... 148
Cooling ................................................... 150
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows............................................... 150
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 333
Heating ................................................... 149
HFL (HandsFreeLink®)............................... 214
High Beam Indicator .................................. 76
Hill Start Assist System ............................. 260
I
Identification Numbers ............................ 366
Engine and Transmission ......................... 366
Vehicle Identification ............................... 366
Ignition Switch ......................................... 117
Illumination Control ................................ 123
Knob ...................................................... 123
Immobilizer System.................................. 112
Indicator ................................................... 77
Indicators.................................................... 70
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .................... 73
AWD System............................................. 73
Charging System............................... 71, 353
CRUISE CONTROL ............................. 78, 266
CRUISE MAIN.................................... 78, 265
Door Open.......................................... 30, 74
ECON Mode ..................................... 77, 125
EPS (Electric Power Steering
System) ........................................... 75, 355
Fog Light .................................................. 76
High Beam................................................ 76
Immobilizer System ................................... 77
Lights On .................................................. 76
Low Fuel ................................................... 72
Low Oil Pressure ............................... 70, 353
Low Tire Pressure ...................... 75, 270, 271
Maintenance Minder......................... 78, 289
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 71, 354
Parking Brake and Brake System ....... 70, 355
Seat Belt Reminder.............................. 32, 72
Security System Alarm............................... 77
Shift Lever Position.................................... 71
Side Airbag Off ................................... 52, 76
Supplemental Restraint System ........... 50, 73
Tailgate Open ........................................... 74
TPMS ................................................ 75, 272
CR-V-31T0A600.book 378 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
379
Index
Transmission ............................................. 72
Turn Signal ............................................... 76
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist)
System ............................................ 74, 268
VSA® OFF.......................................... 74, 269
Washer Level ............................................ 78
Information .............................................. 363
Information Display ................................... 80
Instrument Panel........................................ 69
Brightness Control .................................. 123
Interior Lights........................................... 138
Interior Rearview Mirror ......................... 126
iPod®................................................. 167, 183
J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench)........................ 344
Jump Starting........................................... 348
K
Key Number Tag ...................................... 101
Keyless Lockout Prevention..................... 103
Keys........................................................... 100
Lockout Prevention ................................. 103
Master Keys ............................................ 100
Number Tag............................................ 101
Rear Door Won’t Open ........................... 105
Remote Transmitter ................................ 102
Types and Functions................................ 100
Valet Key ................................................ 101
Won’t Turn................................................ 20
Kickdown (Automatic Transmission)....... 262
L
Language (HFL)......................................... 215
LATCH (Child Seats) .............................. 59, 63
Lights................................................. 118, 309
Automatic ............................................... 119
Bulb Replacement.................................... 309
Daytime Running Lights........................... 120
Fog Lights................................................ 120
High Beam Indicator .................................. 76
Interior .................................................... 138
Light Switches ......................................... 118
Lights On Indicator .................................... 76
Turn Signals............................................. 118
Load Limits................................................ 249
Locking/Unlocking .................................... 100
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .................. 106
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 105
From Inside.............................................. 104
From Outside........................................... 102
Keys ........................................................ 100
Using a Key ............................................. 103
Lockout Prevention System...................... 103
Low Battery Charge.................................. 353
Low Fuel Indicator...................................... 72
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 70, 353
Lower Anchors...................................... 59, 63
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 249
M
Maintenance............................................. 285
Battery .................................................... 329
Brake Fluid .............................................. 307
Cleaning ................................................. 334
Climate Control System........................... 333
Coolant................................................... 304
Heating and Cooling System ................... 333
Maintenance Minder™ ........................... 289
Oil........................................................... 300
Precautions ............................................. 286
Radiator .................................................. 305
Remote Control....................................... 331
Remote Transmitter................................. 330
Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 309
Safety...................................................... 287
Service Items ................................... 291, 295
Tires ........................................................ 320
Transmission Fluid ................................... 306
Under the Hood ...................................... 297
Wireless Headphone................................ 332
Malfunction Indicator Lamp.............. 71, 354
Map Lights ................................................ 138
Maximum Load Limit ............................... 249
Meters, Gauges........................................... 79
Mirrors ...................................................... 126
Adjusting ................................................ 126
Door ....................................................... 127
Exterior ................................................... 127
Interior Rearview ..................................... 126
Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 283
CR-V-31T0A600.book 379 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
380
Index
Moonroof.................................................. 116
MP3.................................... 163, 170, 180, 188
Multi-Information Display.......................... 83
Multi-View Rear Camera .......................... 278
N
Numbers (Identification) .......................... 366
O
Odometer.................................................... 80
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines.............. 257
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 299
Adding .................................................... 301
Checking................................................. 300
Displaying Oil Life ............................ 289, 293
Low Oil Pressure Indicator.................. 70, 353
Recommended Engine Oil........................ 299
Viscosity .................................................. 299
Opening/Closing
Hood....................................................... 298
Moonroof................................................ 116
Power Windows ...................................... 114
Tailgate ................................................... 110
Outside Temperature ................................. 82
Adusting.................................................... 82
Overheating .............................................. 351
P
Pandora®................................................... 186
Panic Mode ............................................... 113
Parking...................................................... 277
Parking Brake ........................................... 273
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator............................................ 70, 355
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 51
Passing Indicators ..................................... 118
Power Windows ....................................... 114
Precautions While Driving ....................... 261
Driving Guidelines for Your Utility
Vehicle .................................................. 261
Rain ........................................................ 261
Pregnant Women ....................................... 37
Puncture (Tire).......................................... 341
R
Radiator .................................................... 305
Radio (AM/FM) ................................. 161, 175
Radio (XM®).............................................. 178
Radio Data System (RDS) ................. 162, 177
Range .................................................... 81, 84
RDS (Radio Data System) ................. 162, 177
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing)....... 369
REAL TIME AWD with Intelligent Control
System™.................................................. 270
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button ..................................................... 124
Rear Entertainment System ..................... 193
Rear Seat Back .......................................... 136
Rear Seats (Folding Down) ...................... 135
Rearview Camera ..................................... 278
Rearview Mirror ....................................... 126
Refueling .................................................. 279
Fuel Gauge ............................................... 79
Gasoline ......................................... 279, 364
Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 72
Regulations .............................. 271, 323, 367
Remote Transmitter................................. 102
Replacement
Battery.................................................... 330
Bulbs ...................................................... 309
Front Wiper Blade Rubber ....................... 316
Fuses .............................................. 357, 358
Rear Wiper Blade Rubber ........................ 318
Tires........................................................ 326
Reporting Safety Defects......................... 368
Resetting a Trip Meter............................... 81
S
Safe Driving................................................ 25
Safety Check............................................... 30
Safety Labels .............................................. 68
Safety Message .......................................... 23
Seat Belts .................................................... 31
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor ................. 35
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 33
Checking .................................................. 38
Detachable Anchor ................................... 36
Fastening .................................................. 34
CR-V-31T0A600.book 380 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
381
Index
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder
Seat Belt ................................................. 62
Pregnant Women...................................... 37
Reminder .................................................. 32
Warning Indicator ............................... 32, 72
Seat Heaters ............................................. 145
Seats.......................................................... 128
Adjusting ................................................ 128
Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support.................. 128
Front Seats.............................................. 128
Rear Seats............................................... 135
Seat Heaters ........................................... 145
Security System ........................................ 112
Immobilizer System Indicator..................... 77
Security System Alarm Indicator ................ 77
SEL/RESET Knob.................................... 80, 83
Select Lever ........................................ 16, 263
Operation ......................................... 16, 264
Releasing ................................................ 350
Won’t Move ........................................... 350
Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 58
Selector Knob (Audio) ..................... 159, 173
Setting the Clock........................................ 98
Shift Lever .......................................... 16, 263
Shift Lever Position Indicator ............ 71, 264
Shifting (Transmission) ............................ 263
Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 35
Side Airbags ............................................... 46
Cutoff System........................................... 48
Off Indicator ............................................. 48
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 49
SMS Text Message ............................ 226, 238
Snow Tires................................................. 328
Spare Tire .......................................... 341, 365
Spark Plugs................................................ 364
Specifications ............................................ 364
Specified Fuel.................................... 279, 364
Speedometer .............................................. 79
SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................. 42
Starting the Engine .................................. 259
Does Not Start......................................... 347
Engine Switch Buzzer .............................. 117
Jump Starting .......................................... 348
Steering Wheel ......................................... 125
Adjusting................................................. 125
Stopping.................................................... 277
Summer Tires ............................................ 328
Sunglasses Holder..................................... 144
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........ 42
Switches (Around the Steering
Wheel) ............................................. 2, 3, 117
Synchronized Mode.................................. 153
T
Tachometer................................................. 79
Tailgate ..................................................... 110
Unable to Open....................................... 361
Temperature Gauge ................................... 79
Temperature Sensor ................................. 154
Text Message .................................... 226, 238
Time (Setting) ............................................. 98
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ..................................................... 270
Indicator............................................ 75, 356
Tires........................................................... 320
Air Pressure..................................... 321, 365
Checking and Maintaining ...................... 320
Inspection ............................................... 320
Labeling .................................................. 321
Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 341
Regulations ............................................. 323
Rotation .................................................. 327
Spare Tire........................................ 341, 365
Summer .................................................. 328
Tire Chains .............................................. 328
Wear Indicators....................................... 325
Winter..................................................... 328
Tonneau Cover ......................................... 146
Tools.......................................................... 340
Towing a Trailer ....................................... 251
Equipment and Accessories ..................... 252
Load Limits.............................................. 251
Towing Your Vehicle................................ 255
Behind a Motorhome .............................. 255
Emergency .............................................. 360
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System).................................................... 270
Indicator............................................ 75, 356
CR-V-31T0A600.book 381 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
382
Index
Transmission.............................................. 263
Automatic ............................................... 263
Fluid ........................................................ 306
Number................................................... 366
Shift Lever Position Indicator .............. 71, 264
Trip Meter ................................................... 81
Troubleshooting ....................................... 339
Blown Fuse...................................... 357, 358
Brake Pedal Vibrates .................................. 20
Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door .......... 21
Emergency Towing .................................. 360
Engine Won’t Start .................................. 347
Noise When Braking .................................. 21
Overheating............................................. 351
Puncture/Flat Tire..................................... 341
Rear Door Won’t Open ...................... 20, 105
Select Lever Won’t Move ......................... 350
Warning Indicators .................................... 70
Turn Signals............................................... 118
Indicators (Instrument Panel)...................... 76
U
Unlocking the Doors................................. 102
Unlocking the Front Doors from the
Inside ......................................................... 11
USB Adapter Cable ........................... 156, 157
USB Flash Drives........................................ 213
V
Valet Key................................................... 101
Vanity Mirrors............................................... 5
Vehicle Identification Number ................ 366
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®).................. 268
Off Button............................................... 269
Off Indicator.............................................. 74
System Indicator........................................ 74
Viscosity (Oil) .................................... 299, 365
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist).................. 268
W
Wallpaper ................................................... 92
Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 353
Warning Labels........................................... 68
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately) .............................................. 371
Watts......................................................... 364
Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 325
Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 344
Window Washers ..................................... 121
Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 308
Switch..................................................... 121
Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 114
Windshield................................................ 121
Cleaning ................................................. 337
Defrosting/Defogging...................... 150, 152
Washer Fluid ........................................... 308
Wiper Blades ........................................... 316
Wipers and Washers................................ 121
Winter Tires.............................................. 328
Snow Tires .............................................. 328
Tire Chains.............................................. 328
Wipers and Washers ................................ 121
Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades..... 316
Front....................................................... 121
Rear........................................................ 122
WMA................................. 163, 170, 180, 188
Worn Tires ................................................ 320
X
XM® Radio ................................................ 178
CR-V-31T0A600.book 382 ページ ２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
